Canon All in One Printer 4839B002 User Manual

Basic Operation Guide  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
Network Setting Procedure  
Security Functions  
Searching in Detail  
See the e-Manual.  
User Software CD-ROM  
Searching the Installation and  
Connection Procedure  
See the Starter Guide.  
Be sure to read the manual before using  
the machine.  
Keep the manual for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of print functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You  
can enlarge or reduce documents, print multiple-page data onto one sheet, and perform 2-sided printing. Also you  
can print from a USB memory connected to the machine as well as from a computer.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted print features that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
Printing documents from a computer  
Reduced Layout  
Various Printing Functions  
You can reduce multiple documents to print them onto one  
sheet.  
Enlarged/Reduced Printing  
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to  
copy on standard size paper or specify the copy ratio in  
percentage.  
2-Sided Printing  
You can print on both sides of paper.  
Watermark Printing  
Miscellaneous Printing Functions  
You can superimpose watermarks (such as [COPY] and  
[DRAFT]) over the documents created by an application.  
Booklet Printing  
Booklet printing allows you to make a booklet by folding  
printouts in half.  
Displaying a Preview before Printing  
You can check the printout result on a computer display.  
Poster Printing  
You can magnify and divide a single page image to print it out  
Selecting a "Profile"  
on multiple sheets of paper. You can make one large poster  
by joining these printouts together.  
Some printer driver settings are provided as "Profiles"  
beforehand.  
You can perform printing which suits your needs only by  
selecting a "Profile."  
For details, see "Printing" in the  
e-Manual.  
Printing documents from a USB memory (Media printing)  
You can directly print the data loaded into the USB memory which has been connected to the machine.  
Data  
Print  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
(D1370/D1350 only)  
There are a variety of fax functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. The  
machine is also equipped with the PC Fax function which can send a document from a computer directly, which  
reduces paper costs.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted fax features that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
For details, see "Fax" in the  
e-Manual.  
Sending a Document Directly from a Computer (PC Fax)  
You can send a document or image created in an application  
as a fax directly using the fax driver from a computer on a  
network. Because you do not need to print the document, you  
can reduce the paper cost as well as send a clear document  
which has little dirt or blur.  
You can import the address book using the fax driver,  
enabling you to send a fax to a destination easily without  
mistakes.  
You can also create a cover sheet for when sending a fax.  
* You need to install the fax driver in a computer.  
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the following.  
To install the Fax Driver  
→ Starter Guide or Mac Fax Driver Installation Guide  
To view how to use each function  
→ Fax Driver’s Help  
To view how to display the Mac Fax Driver Installation Guide or Fax  
Data is created  
in a computer  
Send  
Fax driver screen  
Forwarding the Received Fax  
You can forward received faxes stored in the  
memory to a specified destination.  
Received Fax  
Forward  
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
By registering destinations for sending faxes  
beforehand, you can save many steps to enter  
the destinations when sending the documents.  
One-touch keys  
Coded dialing  
Group dialing  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
(D1370/D1350 only)  
Various Sending/Receiving Functions  
Various Sending Functions  
Various Methods for Specifying a Destination  
Destination Group  
You can combine multiple destinations and register them as a  
group.  
Up to 50 destinations can be combined.  
You can register fax destinations in the address book. You can  
specify the destinations using various methods, enabling you to  
send documents quickly and easily.  
Destination search  
A A AA  
BBBB  
CCCC  
A A A A A  
B B B B B  
C C C C C  
Specifying from the sending history  
One-touch keys  
By registering destinations in one-touch keys, you can specify  
a destination in one step.  
The previous setting  
You can register up to 4 destinations in one-touch keys.  
The second previous setting  
The third previous setting  
A A A  
Sequential broadcast  
By scanning a document once, you can send the same  
document to multiple destinations.  
Coded dialing  
Because you can register up to 100 destinations under coded  
dial codes, you can register destinations which cannot be  
registered under one-touch keys.  
If you forget the coded dial codes, you can specify the  
destination by searching it in the address book.  
A A A  
C C C  
M M M  
S S S  
###  
Dial Code  
BBB  
Various Receiving Functions  
Receiving in the Memory  
Remote Receiving  
Received documents are normally printed immediately.  
However, you can store the documents temporarily in the  
memory without printing.  
You can print the stored documents at any time. If you do not  
need them, you can delete them, saving paper to be used.  
If an external telephone is connected, you can switch to the  
fax receiving mode immediately by dialing the ID number for  
fax receiving using the dial buttons of the telephone during a  
phone call.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of scan functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You  
can easily save scanned documents into your computer or a USB memory, and also send them to your e-mail  
application or a file server directly from the machine.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted scan features that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
Saving in a Computer  
There are two methods for saving scanned documents in a computer.  
Saving the Documents Using the Operation Panel of the Machine  
You can easily save scanned documents in a computer only by  
operating the operation panel of the machine.  
1 Documents  
Various scanning settings have been prepared for your purposes.  
Therefore, you can create a "Searchable PDF*" file, which can be used  
for text retrieval or as text data, without specifying special settings.  
3
Data  
2
* If you are using Macintosh, you may not create "Searchable PDF."  
Saving the Documents Using Operations from a Computer  
For details, see "Scan" in the  
e-Manual.  
Scanning with the MF Toolbox*  
Scanning is performed by operating the software  
supplied with the machine.  
* MF Toolbox for Macintosh and MF Toolbox for Windows  
may be different in some features.  
For details, see the Scanner Driver Guide.  
2
3
Data  
1 Documents  
Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7 Only)  
Scanning from an Application  
Scanning is performed using the driver system supplied with  
Windows operating systems.  
Scanning is performed using  
your application.  
There are various scanning methods.  
This allows you to open the  
scanned data as is in your  
application.  
Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] dialog box  
Scanning from the [Windows Fax and Scan] dialog box  
Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery  
Scanning from an Application  
Saving in a USB Memory  
You can save scanned documents in a  
USB memory connected to the  
machine.  
Documents  
Data  
Emailing scanned documents (D1370 only)  
You can send scanned documents to  
your e-mail application.  
+
Documents  
Data  
E-mail  
Sending scanned documents to a file server (D1370 only)  
You can send scanned documents to a  
file server.  
Documents  
Data  
File server  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks  
Copy  
Print  
Fax  
Scan  
Network Settings & Remote UI  
There are a variety of network settings that are explained in the e-Manual. Since the machine has a built-in network  
board, you can print, fax, and scan from a computer via a network. You can also perform efficient management by  
configuring the machine using the Remote UI.  
Below is a quick overview of highlighted network settings that you can utilize in your everyday use.  
For details, see "Network Settings" in the  
e-Manual.  
Various Network Settings  
Configuration for communicating  
Basic Network Settings  
Miscellaneous Settings  
with a computer  
Setting the IP address (IPv4)  
Configuring the machine  
- LPD, RAW, WSD  
As needed  
Communication mode/  
Communication speed  
- IP address  
- Subnet mask  
- Gateway address  
Waiting time for connection  
DNS  
Configuring a computer  
As needed  
WINS server  
- Port settings  
- Sharing settings for the printer  
Setting the IP address (IPv6)  
For details, see "Security" in the  
e-Manual.  
Security Settings  
Restricting Connection  
to a Network or Computer  
Printing Functions/Restricting Destination  
Operations/Sending Functions  
Administration Settings  
System administrator settings  
- Manager ID/PIN  
IP address filtering  
Secure printing  
MAC address filtering  
SNMP settings  
Address book PIN  
Device information  
Restricting new destinations  
Restricting the PC fax  
- Device name/Installation site  
Allowing the HTTP communication  
Setting a port number  
Dedicated port settings  
Restricting USB connection  
Restricting job operations  
Dept. ID management  
Restricting sending from history  
Fax number confirmation re-entry  
Restricting sequential broadcast  
Restricting displaying the job history  
- Department ID/PIN/  
Function restriction  
- Unknown ID job management  
Remote UI On/Off  
For details, see "Setting and Managing from Computer" in the  
e-Manual.  
Configuring Using the Remote UI  
Remote UI Functions  
How to start the Remote UI  
e-Manual → Starting the Remote UI  
Checking the status and information  
of the machine  
Start the web browser.  
Log on to the Remote UI.  
1
2
3
(1) Select [Management Mode] or [End-User Mode].  
Job Management  
Preferences  
(2) For [Management Mode], enter [System Manager ID]  
and [System Manager PIN].  
Enter "http://<the IP address of the  
machine>/" in the address field, and  
then press the [ENTER] key on your  
keyboard.  
For [End-User Mode], enter [User Name].  
Function settings  
System settings  
(3) Click [Log in].  
Address book management  
(1)  
(2)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C o n t e n t s  
Contents  
viii  
xi  
Manuals for the Machine  
Available Features  
xii  
How to Use This Manual  
Important Safety Instructions  
Installation Requirements and Handling  
Legal Notices  
xii  
xiii  
xvii  
xix  
xxiii  
Laser Safety  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manuals for the Machine  
Starter Guide  
Read this manual first.  
This manual describes the settings for  
setting up the machine and installing  
the software. Be sure to read this  
manual before using the machine.  
Preface  
Installing the Machine  
Configuring and Connecting the Fax  
Connecting to a Computer and Installing the Drivers  
Appendix  
Basic Operation Guide  
This manual  
Before Using the Machine  
Document and Paper Handling  
Copying  
Printing from a Computer  
Registering Destinations in the  
Address Book  
Using the Scan Functions  
Maintenance  
Troubleshooting  
Registering/Setting  
Functions  
Read this manual next.  
This manual describes the basic use of  
the machine.  
Appendix  
Using the Fax Functions  
*
The Send Setting Guide is included in  
the User Software CD-ROM.  
(D1370 only)  
Send Setting Guide  
Read this manual for how  
Send to E-mail Function  
Store to Shared Folder Function  
to set Send features.  
This manual describes setting for  
sending scanned data to E-mail and/or  
file servers.  
* The e-Manual is included in the User Software CD-ROM.  
e-Manual  
Read the desired chapter  
Security  
Important Safety  
Instructions  
Basic Operation  
Copy*1  
Setting and Managing  
from Computer  
Troubleshooting  
Maintenance  
Setting Menu List  
Specifications  
to suit your needs.  
The e-Manual is categorized by subject  
to find desired information easily.  
Fax*1  
Print*1  
Scan  
Network Settings  
1
*
If you are using Macintosh, see the following Driver Guides or Help for more details on these  
functions.  
You can find the driver guides in the following locations on the User Software CD-ROM.  
• Mac UFR II Printer Driver Installation Guide [Documents] - [Print] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
• Mac PS Printer Driver Installation Guide [Documents] - [Print(PS)] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
• Mac Fax Driver Installation Guide [Documents] - [FAX] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
• Mac Scanner Driver Guide [Documents] - [Scan] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Available Features  
The machine offers the following features.  
: available  
— : not available  
Send to Email  
/
Store to  
Copy  
(2-sided)  
Print  
(2-sided)  
Print  
(PS/PCL)  
Fax  
(PC Fax)  
Remote  
UI  
ADF  
(2-sided)  
Scan  
Shared Folder  
D1370  
D1350  
D1320  
How to Use This Manual  
Symbols Used in This Manual  
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To  
use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the  
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.  
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine  
correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.  
IMPORTANT  
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is  
highly recommended.  
NOTE  
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the  
described operations.  
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual  
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.  
Operation panel keys: [Key icon] + (Key name)  
Example: [ ] (Stop)  
Display: <Specify destination.>  
Buttons and items on the computer display: [Preferences]  
Illustrations Used in This Manual  
Illustrations used in this manual  
Illustrations of the model D1370 are used in this manual. When there is any difference among  
the machines, it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g.,D1320.”  
For information on the standard features for each model, see the followings.  
Displays used in this manual  
The display used in this manual is the factory preset display for the D1370. Depending on the system configuration and product  
purchased, the appearance of the display may differ.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important Safety Instructions  
Please read theseImportant Safety Instructionsthoroughly before operating the machine.  
As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or to prevent destruction of property, always pay  
attention to these instructions and operational requirements.  
Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual.  
• Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this  
may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
Installation  
- A damp or dusty location  
WARNING  
- A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a  
• Do not install the machine in a location near alcohol, paint  
thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable  
substances come into contact with electrical parts inside  
the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not place the following items on the machine.  
- Necklaces and other metal objects  
cookery or humidifier  
- A location exposed to rain or snow  
- A location near a water faucet or water  
- A location exposed to direct sunlight  
- A location subject to high temperatures  
- A location near open flames  
• When installing the machine, gently lower the machine to  
the installation site so as not to catch your hands between  
the machine and the floor or between the machine and  
other equipment, as this may result in personal injury.  
• When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by  
following the instructions in this manual. If not connected  
properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock.  
• When moving the machine, follow the instructions in this  
manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you  
to drop the machine, resulting in personal injury.  
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with  
water or liquids  
If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area  
inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical  
shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the  
machine, immediately turn off the power switches of the  
machine and computer (1) and disconnect the interface  
cable if it is connected (2). Then, unplug the power plug  
from the AC power outlet (3) and contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer.  
(1)  
Power Supply  
WARNING  
(3)  
OFF  
(2)  
(2)  
(3)  
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not  
place heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or  
excessively bend it. This can cause electrical damage,  
resulting in fire or electrical shock.  
• Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to  
do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt, resulting  
in a fire or electrical shock.  
ON  
(1)  
OFF  
• The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a  
loose connection and cause overheating, which could result  
in a fire.  
CAUTION  
• The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on,  
fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it.  
Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an  
accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as  
this can result in electrical shock.  
• Do not plug the power cord into a multiplug power strip, as  
this can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this  
can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on  
unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject  
to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall  
or tip over, resulting in personal injury.  
• The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of  
working parts inside the machine. Never place the machine  
on a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug. Blocking the  
slots can cause the machine to overheat, resulting in a fire.  
• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet.  
Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the  
power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires  
inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a  
fire. Avoid the following situations:  
- Connecting and disconnecting the power cord  
frequently.  
- Tripping over the power cord.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
- The power cord is bent near the connection part, and  
continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or  
the connection part.  
CAUTION  
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. The object or  
the machine may fall, resulting in personal injury.  
- Applying a shock to the power connector.  
• Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as  
this can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an  
extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Remove the power plug from the AC power outlet  
and refrain from using the machine during a thunder  
storm. Lightening can result in a fire, electrical shock or  
malfunction.  
• Turn off the power switch when the machine will not be  
used for a long period of time, such as overnight. Turn off  
the machine and unplug the power plug if the machine  
will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for  
several days.  
• Open or close covers and install or remove drawers gently  
and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers.  
• Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the  
output area. Even if the machine is not printing, the roller  
may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing,  
resulting in personal injury.  
• The output slot is hot during and immediately after  
printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot,  
as this may result in burns.  
• Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output.  
Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the  
removed paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure  
to do so may result in burns.  
• When performing copy with a thick book placed on the  
platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully. This may  
damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.  
CAUTION  
• Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed  
herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power  
plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose the  
core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation,  
causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can  
be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power  
plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency.  
• Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary,  
on the platen glass. This may damage the platen glass and  
cause personal injury.  
Handling  
• Close the feeder gently so as not to catch your hand. This  
may result in personal injury.  
WARNING  
• Do not disassemble or modify the machine. There are  
high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the  
machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly.  
Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables,  
internal gears, or electrical parts.  
• If the machine makes an unusual noise or emits smoke,  
heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn off the power  
switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the  
interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power  
plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire  
or electrical shock.  
• The laser beam can be harmful to the human body. The  
laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover,  
so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during  
normal machine operation. Read the following remarks and  
instructions for safety.  
- Never open covers other than those indicated in this  
manual.  
- Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of  
the laser scanner unit.  
• Do not use flammable sprays near the machine. If  
flammable substances come into contact with electrical  
parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
• Always turn off the power switches of the machine and  
computer, and then unplug the power plug and interface  
cables before moving the machine. Failure to do so can  
damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
• Confirm that the power plug or power connector is inserted  
completely after moving the machine. Failure to do so can  
result in an overheating and fire.  
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects  
inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other  
flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner,  
etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact  
with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result  
in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or  
spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the power  
switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the  
interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power  
plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer.  
- If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes,  
exposure may cause damage to your eyes.  
• If you operate this machine in manners other than the  
control, adjustment, and operating procedures prescribed  
in this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
• This machine is confirmed as the class 1 laser product in  
IEC60825-1:2007.  
• When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power  
plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the  
metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical  
shock.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Inspections  
CAUTION  
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine  
become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or  
when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch  
the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in  
burns.  
WARNING  
• When cleaning the machine, turn off the machine and  
computer, and unplug the interface cables and power plug.  
Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.  
• Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet  
periodically and clean the area around the base of the  
power plug’s metal pins and the AC power outlet with a  
dry cloth to remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty,  
or smoky locations, dust can build up around the power  
plug and become damp, which can cause a short circuit,  
resulting in a fire.  
• Clean the machine with a well wrung out cloth dampened  
with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not  
use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable  
substances. If flammable substances come into contact  
with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a  
fire or electrical shock.  
• Some areas inside the machine are subject to high voltage.  
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside  
of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets,  
or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine,  
as this can result in burns or electrical shock.  
• Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames.  
This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to  
ignite, resulting in burns or fire.  
• Confirm that the power plug or power connector is inserted  
completely after cleaning the machine. Failure to do so can  
result in an overheating and fire.  
• Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following  
conditions may result in fire, so please contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the  
inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat  
emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a  
prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low  
temperature burns, even though you did not touch the  
fixing unit and its surroundings directly, as this may result  
in burns.  
• If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that  
any pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine  
according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your  
hand in an area other than indicated areas, as this may  
result in personal injuries or burns.  
- There are burn marks on the power plug.  
- The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken.  
- The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power  
cord.  
• When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner  
cartridge, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or  
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner  
gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately  
with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner,  
making it impossible to remove the toner stains.  
• When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the  
toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into your  
eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash  
them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.  
- The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked, or  
dented.  
- A part of the power cord becomes hot.  
• Check regularly that the power cord and plug are not  
handled in the following manner. Failure to do so can result  
in a fire or electrical shock.  
- The power connector is loosened.  
- Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy  
object or by fixing it with staples.  
• When loading paper or removing jammed documents or  
paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of  
the paper.  
- The power plug is loosened.  
- The power cord is tied in a bundle.  
• When removing a toner cartridge, remove the toner  
cartridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from  
scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets  
into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold  
water and consult a physician.  
- A part of the power cord is put in an aisle.  
- The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The  
toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner  
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with  
cold water and consult a physician.  
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to  
inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with  
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,  
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale  
the toner, consult a physician immediately.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Consumables  
WARNING  
• Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This  
may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.  
• Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed  
to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to ignite,  
resulting in burns or fire.  
• When disposing of a toner cartridge, place the toner  
cartridge into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering,  
and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local  
regulations.  
CAUTION  
• Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of  
the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are  
ingested, consult a physician immediately.  
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The  
toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner  
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with  
cold water and consult a physician.  
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to  
inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with  
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,  
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale  
the toner, consult a physician immediately.  
• Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at  
midpoint, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets  
into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold  
water and consult a physician.  
Others  
WARNING  
• If you are using a cardiac pacemaker  
This machine generates a low level magnetic field. If you  
use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please  
move away from this machine and consult your physician  
immediately.  
Telephone Equipment  
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions  
should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric  
shock, and injury to persons, including the following:  
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub,  
kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a  
swimming pool.  
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as  
there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.  
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity  
of the leak.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation Requirements and Handling  
In order to use this machine in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the machine in a place that fulfills the following conditions.  
Also, read the remarks carefully.  
Temperature and Humidity Conditions  
Installation Requirements  
• Temperature range: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)  
• A location with sufficient space  
• Humidity range: 20 to 80 % RH (no condensation)  
• A location with good ventilation  
• A location with a flat, even surface  
• A location able to fully support the weight of the machine  
IMPORTANT  
Protecting the machine from condensation  
IMPORTANT  
• To prevent condensation from forming inside the machine  
in the following cases, let the machine adjust to the  
ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours  
before use.  
Do not install the machine in the following locations, as  
this may result in damage to the machine.  
• A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or  
humidity  
• A location subject to condensation  
- When the room where the machine is installed is heated  
rapidly  
- When the machine is moved from a cool or dry location  
to a hot or humid location  
• If water droplets (condensation) form inside the machine,  
this can result in paper jams or poor print quality.  
• A poorly ventilated location  
(If you use the machine for a long time or to perform a large  
amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone  
or other odors generated by the machine may create an  
uncomfortable working environment. In addition, chemical  
particles are dispersed during printing; therefore, it is  
important to provide adequate ventilation.)  
• A location near equipment that generates magnetic or  
electromagnetic waves  
• A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur  
• A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases  
When using an ultrasonic humidifier  
When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, it is therefore  
recommended that you use purified water or other water that  
is free of impurities.  
If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will  
be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside the  
machine, causing degradation in print quality.  
• A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from  
the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable  
to sink.  
Power Supply Requirements  
120 to 127 V, 60 Hz  
Installation Space  
Required installation space  
IMPORTANT  
Precautions when connecting the power cord  
• Do not connect this machine to an uninterruptible power  
source.  
• Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the machine. Do not  
use the other sockets of the AC power outlet.  
52 3/4" (1,341 mm)  
4" (100 mm)  
4" (100 mm)  
4" (100 mm)  
32 1/2"  
25 5/8"  
(824 mm)  
(650 mm)  
• Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a  
computer.  
Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the machine  
and any of the following equipment.  
4" (100 mm)  
4" (100 mm)  
- Copy machine  
- Air conditioner  
- Shredder  
- Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity  
- Equipment that generates electrical noise  
• When unplugging the power cord, keep interval of 5  
seconds or more before plugging it again.  
Miscellaneous precautions  
• The maximum power consumption of the machine is  
1,100 W or less.  
• Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in supplied voltage may  
cause the machine or computer to operate incorrectly or  
lose data.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Inspections  
IMPORTANT  
• Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this  
machine.  
• Avoid shaking or applying a shock to this machine.  
• To prevent a paper jam, do not turn the power ON/OFF,  
open/close the operation panel or rear cover, and load/  
unload paper in the middle of printing operation.  
• Be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine  
when transporting the machine to a distance.  
• To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in the  
protective bag included with this machine or wrap it in a  
thick cloth.  
• Clean this machine regularly. If this machine becomes  
dusty, it may operate improperly.  
• Use a modular cable of 3 m or shorter in length.  
• Depending on your locale or your telephone connection,  
you may be unable to perform data communication. In this  
case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the  
Canon help line.  
• The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine  
will be available for at least seven (7) years after production  
of this machine model has been discontinued.  
Customer Support  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to  
provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a problem  
with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the  
information in Chapter 9. If you cannot solve the problem  
or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon  
Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON between the hours  
of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday. On-line  
support for 24 hours is also available at the website.  
http://www.canontechsupport.com/  
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical  
support options*:  
• For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support,  
the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to  
frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/  
• Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday  
through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under  
warranty 1-800-OK-CANON  
• For the location of the authorized service facility nearest  
you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-OK-CANON  
• If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the  
above technical support options, repair options are  
available at the time of your call to the live technical  
support number above or via the website at  
http://www.canon.ca/  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the  
title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to  
the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no  
license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or  
granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any  
intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.  
International ENERGY STAR Program  
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has  
determined that this product meets the ENERGY  
STAR Program for energy efficiency.  
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment  
Program is an international program that promotes  
energy saving through the use of computers and  
other office equipment.  
(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the  
PRODUCT.  
The program backs the development and  
dissemination of products with functions that  
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an  
open system in which business proprietors can  
participate voluntarily.  
The targeted products are office equipment, such  
as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and  
copiers. The standards and logos are uniform  
among participating nations.  
(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or  
transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior  
written consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.  
(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the  
SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign to a transferee all of  
your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations  
under the conditions governing the SOFTWARE and  
PRODUCT and (b) such transferee agrees in writing to be  
bound by all these conditions.  
IPv6 Ready Logo  
(6) You may not decrypt, decompile, reverse engineer,  
disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the  
SOFTWARE to human readable form.  
The protocol stack included in this machine has  
obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1 established  
by the IPv6 Forum.  
(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan  
the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the  
SOFTWARE.  
(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of  
the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.  
Trademarks  
(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the  
SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.  
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageCLASS are registered  
trademarks of Canon Inc. in the United States and may also be  
trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries.  
Apple, Mac OS, and Macintosh are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and/or other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks  
or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
Notwithstanding (1) through (9) above, in case any other  
license conditions accompany third-party software modules,  
these software modules are subject to these other conditions,  
as well.  
ACCEPTANCE  
THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE STATED HERE  
OR IN RELATED WARRANTY PROVISIONS SHALL BE DEEMED  
ACCEPTED UPON YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT FOR ONE OR  
MORE OF ITS NORMAL PURPOSES, IF THERE HAS BEEN NO  
OTHER PRIOR EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE.  
THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE GOVERN THE  
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AS DELIVERED WITH THE PRODUCT  
AND ALL UPDATED VERSIONS OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE  
PROVIDED UNDER MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS OR OTHER  
SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE PRODUCT WITH CANON  
USA OR CANON CANADA OR THEIR RESPECTIVE AUTHORIZED  
SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS.  
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks,  
trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.  
Copyright  
© 2011 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.  
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any  
language or computer language in any form or by any means,  
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or  
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.  
The Software Subjected to Other Conditions  
Third Party Software  
This Canon product (thePRODUCT”) includes third-party  
software modules. Use and distribution of these software  
modules (theSOFTWARE”) are subject to the conditions  
below.  
Please refer to e-Manual on a CD-ROM bundled with this  
product, for more detail and corresponding license conditions.  
(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export  
control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries  
involved in the event that this product including the  
SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any  
country.  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Disclaimers  
The information in this document is subject to change without  
notice.  
NOTE  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference  
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to  
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician  
for help.  
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH  
REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,  
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES  
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.  
For CA, USA only  
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special  
handling may apply.  
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for  
details.  
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images  
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce  
certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,  
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be  
prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil  
liability.  
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below.  
This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain  
about the legality of using your product to scan, print or  
otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the  
use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,  
you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for  
guidance.  
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits  
in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Do not make any  
changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise  
specified in this manual. If you make such changes or  
modifications, you could be required to stop operation of the  
equipment.  
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
TEL No. 1-800-OK-CANON  
• Paper Money  
• Money Orders  
Users in the U.S.A.  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
• Certificates of Deposit  
• Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
• Identifying Badges or Insignias  
• Selective Service or Draft Papers  
• Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies  
• Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title  
• Travelers Checks  
• Food Stamps  
• Passports  
• Immigration Papers  
• Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
• Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness  
• Stock Certificates  
• Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of  
Copyright Owner  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine.  
See Chapter 11,Appendix,for specific dimensions and  
weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be  
used.  
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which  
should be installed by the telephone company. If the  
RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile  
operation is not possible.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone  
company’s business representative. The line should be  
a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one  
line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you  
communicate overseas  
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)  
imageCLASS D1370: F161402  
imageCLASS D1350: F161402  
imageCLASS D1320: F161400  
NOTE  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry  
standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial)  
telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch  
eXchange) unit withoutCall Waitingcan be used with your  
facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended  
because they send nonstandard signals to individual  
telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a  
facsimile error.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation  
is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rights of the Telephone Company  
C. Power Requirements  
If this equipment (imageCLASS D1370/D1350/D1320) causes  
harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may  
temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also  
retains the right to make changes in facilities and services  
that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such  
changes are necessary, the telephone company is required to  
give adequate prior notice to the user.  
However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone  
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also,  
the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint  
with the FCC if he/she believes it is necessary.  
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt  
AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.  
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line  
shared with other appliances that causeelectrical noise.Air  
conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of  
this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with  
communications equipment and the sending and receiving  
of documents.  
Connection of the Equipment  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the  
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this  
equipment is a label that contains, among other information,  
a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If  
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone  
company.  
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the  
number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.  
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices  
not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all  
areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0).  
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected  
to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local  
telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the  
product identifier that has the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. The  
digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point  
(e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).  
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is  
provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed  
to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring  
using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by  
the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subjected  
to state tariffs.  
WARNING  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it  
unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic  
device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless  
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or  
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the  
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification  
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the  
message and the telephone number of the sending machine  
or such business, other entity, or individual.  
(The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number  
or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-  
distance transmission charges.)  
NOTE  
In order to program this information into your machine, you  
should complete the procedure for registering your name,  
unit’s telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.  
Users in Canada  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine.  
See Chapter 11,Appendix,for specific dimensions and  
weight.  
In Case of Equipment Malfunction  
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected  
by the procedures described in this guide or the e-Manual,  
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable and  
disconnect the power cord.  
The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the  
power switch turned ON until the problem is completely  
resolved. Users should contact Canon Authorized Service  
Facilities for servicing of equipment, Information regarding  
Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling  
Canon Customer Care Center (1-800-OK-CANON).  
B. Order Information  
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be  
used.  
2. Order a CA11A modular jack, which should be installed  
by the telephone company. If the CA11A jack is not  
present, installation cannot occur.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone  
company’s business representative. The line should be  
a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one  
line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you  
communicate overseas  
NOTE  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry  
standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial)  
telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch  
eXchange) unit withoutCall Waitingcan be used with your  
facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended  
because they send nonstandard signals to individual  
telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a  
facsimile error.  
C. Power Requirements  
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded  
receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be independent  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric  
equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated  
value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack  
should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate  
installation.  
NOTE  
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme  
aux normes industrielles, à savoir:  
ligne téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500  
(pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également possible  
de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à  
poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux  
d’appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de  
perturber le fonctionnement du télécopieur.  
Notice  
• This product meets the applicable Industry Canada  
technical specifications.  
• The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the  
maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to  
a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may  
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the  
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices  
does not exceed five.  
C. Condition d’alimentation  
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre  
à trois branches, du type simple ou double, et qui ne sert  
pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un  
climatiseur ou tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat.  
L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour  
faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche  
de la prise de courant.  
• The REN of this product is 1.0.  
• Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that  
it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also  
be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In  
some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a  
single line individual service may be extended by means of  
a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord).  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the  
above conditions may not prevent deterioration of service  
in some situations.  
• Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an  
authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by  
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to  
this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
Remarques  
• Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications  
techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.  
• Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il  
est permis de le connecter à l’équipement de la compagnie  
de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil  
en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se  
peut qu’il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne  
individuelle d’abonné, qui a été installée par la compagnie,  
au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologués (rallonge  
téléphonique).  
L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect  
des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une  
garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service dans  
certaines circonstances.  
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le  
nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés  
à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une  
interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque  
de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices  
d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède  
pas 5.  
• Users should ensure for their own protection that the  
electrical ground connections of the power utility,  
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if  
present, are connected together. This precaution may be  
particularly important in rural areas.  
CAUTION  
Users should not attempt to make such connections  
themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric  
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
• Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est  
1,0.  
NOTE  
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B  
limits.  
• Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être  
faites par une société d’entretien canadienne autorisée  
par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par le  
fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modification que  
pourrait faire I’utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout  
mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de  
télécommunication le droit de débrancher I’appareil.  
Utilisation au Canada  
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un  
Télécopieur Canon  
• Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que  
les prises de terre de I’appareil d’alimentation, les lignes  
téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y  
en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est  
particulièrement importante dans les zones rurales  
A. Emplacement  
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment  
solide et de taille appropriée (voir le chapitre 11, Annexe  
(Appendix), pour les indications de poids et dimensions).  
B. Installation téléphonique  
CAUTION  
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions)  
doit être utilisée.  
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera  
installé par la compagnie téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la  
mise en place serait impossible.  
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les  
utilisateurs sont invités à faire appel à un service d’inspection  
faisant autorité en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien,  
selon le cas.  
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez  
une ligne d’affaires normale de qualité téléphonique  
courante ou équivalente. Prenez un abonnement d’une  
ligne par appareil.  
NOTE  
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.  
Ligne automatique interurbaine  
ou  
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez  
avec les pays étrangers)  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Safety  
This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as  
a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health  
and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard  
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety  
Act of 1968. This means that the machine does not produce  
hazardous radiation.  
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely  
confined within protective housings and external covers, the  
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase  
of user operation.  
CDRH Regulations  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the  
U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations  
for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations  
apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976.  
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United  
States.  
CAUTION  
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures  
other than those specified in this manual may result in  
hazardous radiation exposure.  
The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the  
machine and is not in a user access area.  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
1
Before Using the Machine  
This chapter describes the features of the machine and its useful functions.  
Parts and Their Functions  
1-2  
Front Side  
1-2  
1-3  
1-3  
1-4  
1-5  
1-6  
1-6  
1-6  
1-6  
1-6  
Back Side  
Interior  
Operation Panel  
FAX operation panel (D1370/D1350 Only)  
LCD (Standby Mode)  
Copy Mode  
Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Scan Mode  
USB Direct Print Mode  
Navigating the Menu  
1-7  
Entering the Menu Screen  
1-7  
1-7  
1-7  
1-7  
1-8  
Scrolling the Menu  
Selecting a Menu Item  
Configuring Menus Using the Navigation Keys  
Returning to the Default Screen  
Entering Text  
1-9  
Changing the Entry Mode  
1-9  
1-9  
1-9  
1-9  
Entering Text, Symbols, and Numbers  
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)  
Deleting text, symbols, or numbers  
Setting the Sleep Timer  
1-11  
1-12  
Setting the Current Date and Time  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parts and Their Functions  
This section describes the parts of the machine and their functions  
Front Side  
(11)(12)  
(1) (2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(10)  
(9)  
(8)  
(7) (6)  
(5)  
(16)  
(15) (14) (13)  
(1) Feeder  
(11) Open Button  
Used to continuously scan documents automatically.  
Push to open the front cover.  
(2) Document guides  
(12) Front Cover  
Adjust these guides to fit the document.  
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge or clear paper  
jams.  
(3) Document feeder tray  
Place your documents on.  
(13) Power Switch  
Turns the power ON or OFF.  
(4) Document delivery tray  
Used to store documents returned by the feeder.  
(14) Paper drawer  
Load paper here.  
(5) Operation panel  
Used to perform various tasks.  
(15) Cassette Feeding Unit-U1 (drawer 2)  
It is an optional paper drawer.  
(6) Multi-purpose tray  
(16) USB memory port  
You can load paper using the multi-purpose tray. Load  
Used to save scanned documents in USB memory, and to print  
postcards or envelopes here.  
files saved in USB memory.  
(7) Auxiliary Tray (Multi-purpose Tray)  
Pull it out and load the paper stack.  
(8) Paper Guides (Multi-purpose Tray)  
Adjust these guides to fit the document.  
(9) Paper stopper  
Prevents paper from falling from the output tray.  
(10) Output tray  
Printed paper such as copies, prints and faxes come out from  
the output tray.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Back Side  
(1) USB port  
Connect the USB cable.  
(1)  
(2)  
(2) LAN port  
Connect the LAN cable.  
(3) External telephone line jack  
Connect the external telephone.  
(8)  
(4) Telephone line jack  
Connect the telephone cable.  
(7)  
(6)  
(5) Power socket  
Connect the power cord.  
(6) Lower rear cover  
Open this guide to clear paper jams.  
(3)  
(4)  
(7) Sub-output tray  
(5)  
Printed paper is output to the sub-output tray with the  
printed side facing up. Printed paper is stacked in reverse page  
order. The sub-output tray is suitable for use when printing  
transparencies, labels, or envelopes that curl easily, because the  
printed paper remains flat when output.  
(8) Back cover  
Open this guide to clear paper jams.  
Interior  
(1)  
(3)  
(2)  
(4)  
(5)  
(4)  
(1) Scanning area  
(4) Duplex unit  
Used to scan documents from the feeder.  
Used for 2-sided printing and copying.  
(2) Platen glass  
(5) Paper size switch lever  
Place your documents on.  
Used for 2-sided printing.  
(3) Toner guides  
Used to insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion on the  
side of the toner cartridge fits into these guides.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation Panel  
D1370/D1350  
(1)  
(2)  
(5)  
(6)  
(3) (4)  
(7)  
D1320  
(1)  
(2)  
(5)  
(6)  
(3) (4)  
(7)  
[Menu] key  
[2-Sided] key  
Press to specify or register various settings.  
You can set 2-sided printing.  
(1)  
[Select Paper] indicator  
Selected paper source turns on.  
[Select Paper/Settings] key  
Mode switch keys  
[Reset] key  
Press to specify the paper size and type to load in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.  
Press to switch the mode to copy, fax, scan or USB direct print.  
(2)  
(3)  
Resets the settings. (Resets the copy/scan/fax/USB direct print mode.)  
Press to check the status of jobs or cancel jobs. You can also check the status of the  
network and machine.  
[Status Monitor/Cancel] key  
[
[
] Key  
] Key  
Press to scroll up or to increase the value.  
Press to scroll down or to decrease the value.  
Press to return to the previous screen or move the cursor to the left.  
Press to decrease the volume while the fax ring tone sounds.  
[
[
] Key  
] Key  
(4)  
Press to proceed to the next screen or move the cursor to the right.  
Press to increase the volume while the fax ring tone sounds.  
[OK] key  
[Back] key  
[View Settings] key  
Numeric keys ([0]-[9])  
Press to confirm an action or setting.  
Press to return to the previous screen.  
You can check the settings.  
Enter characters and numbers.  
Press to switch the character entry mode, and press to switch between pulse and tone  
dialing to send a fax.  
[*] key  
[#] key  
Press to enter symbols.  
Press to manually print reports and lists. You can also specify whether to print a report  
automatically.  
[Report] key  
(5)  
Press to manually set or cancel the Sleep mode. The Energy Saver indicator lights green  
while in the sleep mode.  
[Energy Saver] key  
[ID] key  
[Clear] key  
Press to display the Department ID login window.  
Deletes characters and numbers.  
[Secure Print] key*  
[Stop] key  
[Start] key  
[Error] indicator  
[Processing/Data] indicator  
Used for secure print.  
Press to cancel jobs.  
(6)  
(7)  
Press to start copying, scanning, sending a fax or USB direct print.  
Blinks when an error occurs.  
Blinks during transmission and turns on when the machine has waiting jobs.  
* This key or function is available only for D1370.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FAX operation panel (D1370/D1350 Only)  
(1) (2)(3)  
(1)  
(6)(5) (4)  
[One-touch Speed Dial] keys  
[Address Book] key  
Press to select destinations registered in one-touch keys.  
Searches recipients registered under one-touch keys or coded dial codes.  
Specifies recipients registered.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
[Coded Dial] key  
Redial the last number called. (Only enabled when the mode screens for fax, e-mail or file  
server operations are displayed.)  
[Recall] key  
(4)  
[Hook] key  
[Pause] key  
Press when you want to dial without lifting up the handset of the external telephone.  
Press to insert a pause in the fax number.  
(5)  
(6)  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scan Mode  
Press [  
LCD (Standby Mode)  
] to switch to the scan mode screen.  
This section describes the following screens.  
• Copy Mode  
• Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only)  
• Scan Mode  
When the scan mode screen is displayed, you can make  
your selection by using [ ] or [ ].  
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]  
to proceed to the next screen.  
• USB Direct Print Mode  
Select the scan type.  
Computer  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
NOTE  
To change standby display  
You can change the standby display that appears when the  
power switch is turned ON.  
e-Manual Basic Operation Customizing Display  
Settings Setting the Default Screen  
When the machine is idle for 2 minutes, the screen returns to the  
USB Direct Print Mode  
When using the USB direct print function, press [  
to switch to the mode screen.  
When the USB direct print mode screen is displayed, you  
can make your selection by using [ ] or [ ].  
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]  
to proceed to the next screen.  
]
standby display.  
e-Manual Basic Operation Customizing Timer Settings  
Setting the Auto Reset Timer  
Select printing  
method.  
Select File(s) to pri  
Index print  
Copy Mode  
Press [  
] to switch to the copy mode screen.  
Copy: Press Start  
Sort Files; File Nam...  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
+
Density: 0  
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
When the copy mode screen is displayed, you can make  
your selection by using [ ] or [ ].  
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]  
to proceed to the next screen.  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
+
Density: 0  
-
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Press [  
] to switch to the fax mode screen.  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
When the fax mode screen is displayed, you can make your  
selection by using [ ] or [ ].  
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]  
to proceed to the next screen.  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Navigating the Menu  
This section describes how to navigate the menu and  
configure menu options on the menu screen.  
Use the following keys to navigate the menu and configure  
menu options.  
Scrolling the Menu  
The scroll bar at the right side of the screen indicates that  
more items are available in the menu.  
To select an item that is not shown on the screen, press [  
or [ ] to scroll up and down the menu.  
The currently selected item is highlighted with a black  
background.  
]
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
Preferences  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Menu Back  
OK  
Selecting a Menu Item  
Press [OK] to select the highlighted menu.  
When the menu has a submenu, press [ ] to select the  
item and proceed to the next screen.  
Entering the Menu Screen  
Press [ ] (Menu) to enter the menu screen.  
To return to the previous screen, press [  
] (Back) or [ ].  
Timer Settings  
Menu  
[OK] or [►]  
Time & Date Settings  
Sleep Timer  
Auto Reset Timer  
Screen After Auto R...  
Preferences  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
[Back] or []  
Configuring Menus Using the Navigation Keys  
How to configure menus  
What you want to do  
Screen example  
Procedure  
Density  
-
Background: Default  
+
Adjust levels such as density on  
the scale  
Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the level.  
Press [ ] or [ ] to specify the value.  
NOTE  
Numeric key icon  
Values that you can specify  
You can specify any value shown in the parentheses at  
Auto Reset Timer  
Set the timer  
the bottom of the screen.  
2
min.  
When the numeric key icon is displayed on the  
screen  
(0=Off, 1-9)  
You can enter it using the numeric keys.  
System Manager PIN  
You can enter numbers or characters using the numeric  
keys.  
Enter numbers or characters such  
as a PIN.  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
Confirming the entry  
To confirm the entered number or character:  
• Press [OK].  
• Select <Apply> displayed on the screen using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Returning to the Default Screen  
Press [  
] (Menu) to exit the menu screen and return to  
the default screen.  
NOTE  
If you press [  
] (Menu) before you press [OK]  
The changes made to the settings are not saved.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entering Text  
Enter information (text, symbols, and numbers) using the  
following keys.  
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)  
Move the cursor by pressing [ ] or [ ].  
To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text and  
press [ ].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Deleting text, symbols, or numbers  
To delete text, numbers, or symbols, press [  
To delete all text, numbers, or symbols, press and hold  
] (Clear).  
] (Clear).  
[
Example: Enter <CANON>.  
1
2
Make sure that the entry mode is set to <A>.  
#
C
OK Numeric  
keys  
Press [ ] until the letter “C” appears on the  
screen.  
Changing the Entry Mode  
Register Unit Name  
C
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
Register Unit Name  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
3
4
5
Press [ ] until the letter “A” appears on the  
screen.  
Select <Entry Mode> using [ ] and press [OK].  
You can also press [  
] (Tone) to change the entry mode.  
Register Unit Name  
CA  
<Apply>  
Entry mode  
Text that can be entered  
Alphabet (capital letters) and symbols  
Alphabet (small letters) and symbols  
Numbers  
<A>  
<a>  
Entry Mode: A  
<12>  
Press [ ] until the letter “N” appears on the  
screen.  
Entering Text, Symbols, and Numbers  
Enter using the numeric keys or [  
] (SYMBOLS).  
Entry mode:  
<A>  
Entry mode:  
Entry mode:  
<12>  
Register Unit Name  
CAN  
<Apply>  
Key  
<a>  
@ . - _ /  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Entry Mode: A  
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
Press [ ] until the letter “O” appears on the  
screen.  
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
Register Unit Name  
CANO  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
WXYZ  
wxyz  
(Not available)  
- . * # !“ , ; : ^ ` _ = / |‘ ?  
(Not available)  
~
$ @ % & + \ ( ) [ ] { } <>  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
7
Press [ ] until the letter “N” appears on the  
screen.  
Register Unit Name  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
The entry is complete.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Sleep Timer  
The machine automatically enters the sleep mode after it has  
been idle for a specified length of time.  
4
Specify the time using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
*
*
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.  
We recommend that you use the default timer setting.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
Sleep Timer  
5
min.  
(3-240)  
OK  
NOTE  
To set the auto sleep timer  
You can set the auto sleep timer between <3> and <240> minutes,  
in one minute interval. The default is <5> minutes.  
1
2
Press [ ] (Menu).  
Select <Timer Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
5
Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Menu  
NOTE  
Preferences  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
When the machine enters the sleep mode  
[
] (Energy Saver) lights green.  
To enter the sleep mode manually  
Press [  
] (Energy Saver).  
The machine does not enter the sleep mode when  
3
Select <Sleep Timer> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
the machine is in the middle of operation  
the Processing/Data indicator lights or is blinking  
a message appears on the screen and the Error indicator is  
blinking (except when <Prepare toner cartridge.> and <Output  
Tray Full> is displayed, or when <No Paper> is displayed when  
there are no jobs (D1370/D1350 Only)).  
Timer Settings  
Time & Date Settings  
Sleep Timer  
the machine is in the middle of adjustment or cleaning  
a paper jam occurs  
the handset of the external telephone is left unhooked  
Auto Reset Timer  
Screen After Auto R...  
The machine returns from sleep mode when  
[
] (Energy Saver) is pressed  
the external telephone is taken off the hook  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Current Date and Time  
Specify the date and time display formats and set the current  
date and time.  
Settings  
Purpose  
What to do  
The specified date and time are used for some fax functions  
and reports.  
Select one of the following display  
formats using [ ] or [ ] and press  
Specify the [OK].  
<Date  
Display  
Type>  
Keys to be used for this operation  
date display The formats include the following.  
format.  
• MM/DD/YYYY  
• DD/MM YYYY  
• YYYY MM/DD  
Menu  
Select one of the following display  
formats using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
The formats include the following.  
• 12 Hour (AM/PM)  
<12/24  
Hour  
Clock>  
Specify the  
time display  
format.  
• 24 Hour  
OK  
Use [ ] or [ ] to enter time and date,  
or to switch between <AM> and  
<PM>. To move the cursor, press  
1
2
Press [ ] (Menu).  
[
] or [ ].  
Specify the  
current  
time and  
date.  
<Current  
Time  
Settings>*  
Current Time Settings  
Select <Timer Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
01/01/2011 12:52 AM  
Menu  
Preferences  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
<Time Zone Specify the  
Select the time zone using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Settings>  
time zone.  
To use daylight saving time,  
1. Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
3
4
Select <Time & Date Settings> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
2. Specify the starting date of the  
daylight saving time.  
- Select <Month> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
- Select the starting month and  
press [OK].  
- Select <Day> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
- Select the starting week and  
press [OK].  
- Select the starting day and press  
[OK].  
- Select <Apply> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Timer Settings  
Time & Date Settings  
Sleep Timer  
Auto Reset Timer  
Screen After Auto R...  
Specify  
whether  
to use the  
daylight  
<Daylight  
Savings>  
]
saving time.  
Select the setting using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
Time & Date Settings  
Date Display Type  
12/24 Hour Clock  
Current Time Settin...  
Time Zone Settings  
3. Repeat Step 2 to specify the ending  
date.  
* Make sure to configure <Time Zone Settings> before  
configuring this setting (If you change <Time Zone  
Settings>, <Current Time Settings> is changed accordingly).  
5
Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
2
Document and Paper Handling  
Document Type  
2-2  
Supported Document Types  
2-2  
Scan Area  
2-2  
Copy  
FAX  
2-2  
2-3  
2-3  
Scan  
Placing Documents  
2-4  
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass  
Placing Documents in the Feeder  
2-4  
2-4  
Supported Paper Types  
2-6  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
2-6  
2-7  
Printable Area  
Loading Paper  
2-8  
2-9  
In the Paper Drawer  
2-9  
2-10  
2-12  
2-12  
2-13  
In the Multi-Purpose Tray  
Precautions when Loading Paper  
Paper Loading Capacity  
Paper Loading Orientation  
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo  
(previously printed paper)  
2-13  
2-13  
When printing on envelopes  
Setting the Paper Size and Type  
2-14  
For the Paper Drawer  
2-14  
2-14  
Setting a Custom Paper Size  
Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi-purpose Tray2-15  
Selecting the Print Side  
2-17  
When <Print Speed Priority> is selected (the default setting)  
When <Print Side Priority> is selected  
2-17  
2-17  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Document Type  
Supported Document Types  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
• Plain paper  
• Heavy paper  
• Photograph  
Plain paper  
Type  
• Small documents (for example, index cards)  
• Special types of paper (for example, tracing paper,  
transparencies, etc.)*1  
(Multi-page documents of the same size, thickness and  
weight/one-page documents)  
• Booklet (Up to 3/4(20 mm) thickness)  
Maximum size: 8 1/2x 14(215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)  
Minimum size: 5 1/2x 5(139.7 mm x 128 mm)  
Size (W x L)  
Weight  
Up to 8 1/2x 14(216 mm x 356 mm)  
Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)  
1-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 28 lb Bond (50 to 105g/m²)  
2-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb Bond (64 to 105 g/m²)  
Up to 50 sheets (Letter)*2  
Up to 30 sheets (Legal)*2  
Paper Capacity  
1 sheet  
*1  
To copy transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), make sure to place the documents face down on the platen glass  
and cover them with plain white paper.  
22 lb Bond (80 g/m²)  
*2  
IMPORTANT  
To place your document  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the document is completely dry before placing it on the platen glass or into the feeder.  
To prevent paper jams in the feeder  
Do not use any of the following.  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Coated paper  
Torn paper  
Onion skin or thin paper  
Stapled or clipped documents  
Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer  
Transparencies  
Scan Area  
Make sure that your scan area fits within the shaded area, as shown in the illustrations on the following page.  
* Note that the margins indicated in the illustrations are for your reference. Actual margins can vary.  
* Refer to the following document loading orientation.  
• Platen glass: With the document face down  
• Feeder: With the document loaded in the document feeder tray  
Copy  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
9/32"  
(7 mm)  
9/32"  
(7 mm)  
9/32"  
(7 mm)  
9/32"  
(7 mm)  
9/32"  
9/32"  
(7 mm)  
(7 mm)  
9/32"  
9/32"  
(7 mm)  
(7 mm)  
* See“Printable Area(P. 2-8) if you would like to know the practical printable area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2  
     
FAX  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
1/8"  
(3 mm)  
1/8"  
(3 mm)  
1/8"  
(3 mm)  
1/8"  
(3 mm)  
3/64"  
3/64"  
(1 mm)  
(1 mm)  
3/64"  
3/64"  
(1 mm)  
(1 mm)  
Scan  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
1/16"  
(1.5 mm)  
*The whole document can be scanned without any margins.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Placing Documents  
This section describes how to place documents on the platen  
glass or in the feeder.  
CAUTION  
Precautions when closing the feeder  
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass  
• Be careful not to get your fingers caught. This may  
cause personal injury.  
• Do not press down the feeder forcefully. This may  
damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.  
1
2
3
Open the feeder.  
Placing Documents in the Feeder  
1
Spread the document guides a little wider than  
the document width.  
Place your document face down.  
2
3
Fan the document stack and align the edges of  
the pages.  
Thoroughly fan in  
small batches  
Align the edges on a  
ꢀat surface a few times  
Align the document with the appropriate paper  
size marks.  
If the document does not match any of the paper size marks, align  
the center of your document with the arrow mark.  
A4  
B4  
A5  
Neatly place the document face up.  
Place the document under the load limit guides (A).  
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit  
marks (B).  
A5  
B4  
A4  
4
Close the feeder.  
(A)  
(B)  
The machine is ready to scan or copy the document.  
When scanning or copying is complete, remove the document  
from the platen glass.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Align the document guides to fit the width of the  
document.  
The machine is ready to copy or scan the document.  
IMPORTANT  
Up to 50 documents can be loaded.  
If more than 51 documents are loaded, paper jams may occur, or  
the document may not be scanned.  
While scanning a document  
Do not add or remove documents.  
When scanning is complete  
Remove the document from the document delivery tray to avoid  
paper jams.  
Avoid scanning the same document more than 30 times.  
When scanned repeatedly, the document can become folded or  
torn, which may cause paper jams.  
Be sure to align the document guides with the width of  
the paper.  
If the document guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in  
misfeeds or paper jams.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supported Paper Types  
Paper Size  
The following paper sizes are supported.  
: Supported  
: Not supported  
Paper Source  
Paper size  
Paper drawer*1  
Multi-purpose tray  
A4 (8 1/4x 11 3/4(210 mm x 297 mm))*2*3*4  
B5 (7 1/8" x 10 1/8" (182 mm x 257 mm))*3  
*6  
A5 (5 7/8" x 8 1/4" (148 mm x 210 mm))*3  
Legal (8 1/2" x 14" (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm))*2*3  
Letter (8 1/2" x 11" (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm))*2*3*4  
Statement (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" (139.7 mm x 215.9 mm))*3  
Executive (7 1/4" x 10 1/2" (184 mm x 266.7 mm))  
Officio (8 1/2" x 12 1/2" (215.9 mm x 317.5 mm))*3  
B-officio (8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 355 mm))*3  
M-officio (8 1/2" x 13 3/8" (215.9 mm x 341 mm))*3  
Government - Letter (8" x 10 1/2" (203.2 mm x 266.7 mm))*3  
Government - Legal (8" x 13" (203.2 mm x 330.2 mm))*3  
Foolscap (8 1/2" x 13" (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)*3  
A-foolscap (8 1/8" x 13 3/8" (205.7 mm x 337.8 mm))*3  
Envelope COM10 (4 1/8" x 9 1/2" (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm))*5  
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8" x 7 1/2"(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm))*5  
Envelope C5 (6 3/8" x 9" (162 mm x 229 mm))*5  
Envelope B5 (6 7/8" x 9 7/8" (176 mm x 250 mm))*5  
Envelope DL (4 3/8" x 8 5/8" (110 mm x 220 mm))*5  
Index Card (3" x 5" (76 mm x 127 mm))  
Custom Paper Size  
*1 This type of paper can be loaded also in the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2).  
*2 Can be used for automatic 2-sided printing.  
*3 Received documents can be printed.  
*4 Reports or lists can be printed.  
*5 Make sure the flap is folded.  
*6 You can set custom paper size of Width: 5to 14(127 to 356 mm) and Length: 3to 8 1/2(76 to 216 mm).  
NOTE  
Default paper size  
The default paper size is Letter. To use a different paper size, change the paper size setting.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Type  
The following paper types are supported.  
: Unavailable  
Paper Source/Paper Capacity  
Paper Drawer 2 Multi-purpose  
Paper Type  
Printer Driver Setting  
Paper Drawer 1  
(optional)  
500 sheets  
320 sheets  
Tray  
[Plain Paper]  
Plain paper*1  
16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2)  
24 to 34 lb Bond (90 to 128 g/m2)  
500 sheets  
320 sheets  
50 sheet  
[Plain Paper L]*3  
[Heavy Paper 1]  
40 sheet  
25 sheet  
Heavy paper*2  
35 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (129 to 163 g/m2) [Heavy Paper 2]  
Recycled  
paper*1  
16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2)  
16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2)  
[Recycled Paper]  
500 sheets  
500 sheets  
500 sheets  
500 sheets  
50 sheet  
Color paper*1  
Transparency*4  
Label  
[Color Paper]  
[Transparency]  
[Labels]  
50 sheet  
15 sheet  
20 sheet  
15 sheet  
5 sheets  
Index Card  
Envelope  
[Index Card]  
[Envelope]  
*1 Can be used for automatic 2-sided printing.  
*2 Automatic 2-sided printing is available for up to 34 lb Bond (128 g/m²) of heavy papers.  
*3 To use pre-printed paper, set the paper type to [Plain Paper L] if it is curled. Note that toner may not flow well into the paper.  
*4 Use only the types designed for laser printers.  
To prevent paper jams, do not use the following paper types.  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Torn paper  
CAUTION  
Damp paper  
To print on damp paper  
Very thin paper  
The following problems may occur.  
Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)  
Steam is emitted from the machine’s  
output area.  
Water droplets form on the back side of  
the operation panel and in the output  
area.  
The following paper types do not print well:  
Highly textured paper  
Very smooth paper  
Glossy paper  
Moisture evaporates from damp paper  
due to the heat generated inside the fixing  
unit (it is most likely to occur at low room  
temperatures). This is not a malfunction, but  
you can prevent this by using a stack of new  
unopened paper.  
Make sure that the paper is free of dust, lint, and oil stains.  
Make sure to test print before purchasing large quantities of copy paper.  
Keep the paper wrapped in its original package (unopened or opened) and  
stored in a cool, dry place until ready to use. Make sure to keep it on a flat  
surface.  
Should you smell something burning,  
immediately turn OFF the machine, unplug  
the power plug from the AC power outlet,  
and contact your local authorized Canon  
dealer or the Canon help line. Continued use  
may lead to a fire or electrical shock.  
Store paper stacks in a place where temperatures are somewhere between  
64.4 to 75.2°F (18 to 24°C) and humidity is somewhere between 40 % to 60  
% RH.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printable Area  
The shaded area in the illustration on the following page represents the printable area.  
Note that the margins indicated in the illustration are for your reference. Actual margins can vary.  
* When an envelope is printed, the margin is 3/8" (10 mm)  
on top, bottom, right, and left.  
1/4"  
(5 mm)  
1/4"  
(5 mm)  
1/4"  
(5 mm)  
3/8"  
3/8"  
(10 mm)  
(10 mm)  
3/8"  
(10 mm)  
1/4"  
(5 mm)  
3/8"  
(10 mm)  
NOTE  
To enlarge the printable area  
Apply the following setting from the printer driver.  
1. Click [Advanced Setting] in the [Finishing] page of printer driver.  
2. Set [Enlarge Print Area] to [ON].  
*
Depending on the job, the data may not be printed in a part of document edge, or the bottom edge of paper or the following paper may be  
tainted.  
*
This setting is valid only when the job is printed from the printer driver.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer  
and the multi-purpose tray.  
3
Fan the document stack and even the ends.  
NOTE  
Thoroughly fan in  
small batches  
Align the edges on a  
ꢀat surface a few times  
To set your choice of paper size or type  
By default, the paper size is set to <Letter>, and the type to <Plain  
(16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>. To use a different paper size or type, you  
need to change the default settings.  
In the Paper Drawer  
Before loading paper in the paper drawer, see“Precautions  
4
Load the paper with the printing side down  
so that it aligns with the rear side of the paper  
drawer.  
NOTE  
How to load the paper in the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2):  
Same as in Drawer 1.  
Load the paper in portrait orientation.  
1
2
Pull out the paper drawer.  
NOTE  
When loading paper with a letterhead or logo  
See,“Paper Loading Orientation”(P. 2-13), and load the paper in the  
proper orientation.s.  
Slide the paper guides to the size mark for the  
paper to be loaded.  
While holding the lock release lever (A), adjust the length of the  
paper guide.  
5
Hold down the paper, then set it under the hooks  
(A) on the paper guides.  
(A)  
(A)  
(A)  
(A)  
(A)  
* If you want to change the size of the paper to be loaded, be sure  
to register the paper size in “Setting the Paper Size and Type”  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In the Multi-Purpose Tray  
IMPORTANT  
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without  
space.  
Before loading paper in the multi-purpose tray, see  
If the paper guides are loose or tight, this may result in misfeeds or  
paper jams.  
Use the multi-purpose tray when you want to copy or print on  
a different paper size or type from the one loaded in the paper  
drawer.  
1
Open the multi-purpose tray and pull out the  
auxiliary tray.  
When loading long-size paper  
open the tray extension.  
6
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed  
the line of the load limit mark (A).  
*
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the line of the  
load limit mark. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark  
lines, this may result in misfeeds.  
(A)  
(A)  
(A)  
2
Spread the paper guides a little wider than the  
actual paper width.  
7
Specify the loaded paper size and type.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Gently insert the paper stack into the multi-  
purpose tray with the print side face up.  
5
6
Be sure that the paper stack is loaded under the  
load limit guides (A).  
(A)  
When loading envelopes  
(1) Fold the envelope flap.  
Specify the loaded paper size and type.  
(2) Loosen any stiff corners of the envelope and flatten curls as  
shown in the figure.  
(3) Gently insert the envelope into the multi-purpose tray with the  
print side face up.  
4
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width  
without space.  
IMPORTANT  
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without  
space.  
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in  
misfeeds or paper jams.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions when Loading Paper  
Paper Loading Capacity  
CAUTION  
Be careful when handling paper.  
Handle paper carefully not to cut your hands with the edges  
of the paper.  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
Precautions when inserting the paper drawer  
Be careful not to catch your fingers.  
Paper Source  
(B)  
Multi-purpose Drawer 1  
tray  
IMPORTANT  
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without  
space.  
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in  
misfeeds or paper jams.  
(A)  
(C)  
Drawer 2  
(optional)  
Paper Type  
16 to 23 lb  
Bond (60 to  
89 g/m²)  
Plain  
Approx.  
50 sheets  
Approx.  
500 sheets  
Approx.  
500 sheets  
When using paper that has been poorly cut  
paper  
If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper  
may be fed at once. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then  
align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface.  
24 to 34 lb  
Bond (90 to  
128 g/m²)  
Approx.  
40 sheets  
Approx.  
320 sheets  
Approx.  
320 sheets  
Heavy  
paper  
Do not exceed the line of the load limit mark when  
loading paper.  
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the line of the load  
limit mark. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark lines, this  
may result in misfeeds.  
35 lb Bond  
to 60 lb  
Approx.  
25 sheets  
-
-
Cover (129  
to 163 g/m²)  
16 to 23 lb  
Bond (60 to  
89 g/m²)  
Recycled  
paper  
Approx.  
50 sheets  
Approx.  
500 sheets  
Approx.  
500 sheets  
When printing on envelopes  
Load envelopes with the front side (non-glued side) facing up. You  
cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.  
Also, be sure to close the flap before loading envelopes.  
16 to 23 lb  
Bond (60 to  
89 g/m²)  
Color  
paper  
Approx.  
50 sheets  
Approx.  
500 sheets  
Approx.  
500 sheets  
Approx.  
15 sheets  
Transparency  
Label  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Approx.  
20 sheets  
NOTE  
Approx.  
15 sheets  
Index Card  
Envelope  
For more information on supported paper types  
Approx.  
5 sheets  
Abbreviations on the paper guides inside the paper  
drawer  
Paper size  
Paper guide  
Legal  
Letter  
LGL  
LTR  
Executive  
EXEC  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
2
*
When <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Speed  
Priority> (the default setting)  
When <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>  
Paper Loading Orientation  
*
NOTE  
Paper loading orientation when loading in the multi-  
purpose tray  
The paper loading orientation for the multi-purpose tray is the  
same as that for the paper drawer.  
When printing on envelopes  
Load envelopes with the front side (non-glued side) facing  
up to the Multi-purpose tray as shown below.  
(
: Feeding direction)  
Envelope No.10, DL, ISO-C5  
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo  
(previously printed paper)  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the left of the  
machine when it is viewed from the front.  
Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.  
(
: Feeding direction)  
Paper drawer  
Portrait layout  
Landscape layout  
1-sided  
Envelope ISO-B5  
printing*1  
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the back of the  
machine when it is viewed from the front.  
(with the printing  
side facing down)  
(with the printing  
side facing down)  
1-sided  
printing*2  
(with the printing  
side facing up)  
(with the printing  
side facing up)  
Automatic  
2-sided  
printing  
(with the front side  
facing up)  
(with the front side  
facing up)  
1
*
When <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Speed  
Priority> (the default setting)  
When <Switch Paper Feed Method> us set to <Print Side Priority>  
2
*
Multi-purpose tray  
Portrait layout  
Landscape layout  
1-sided  
printing*1  
(with the printing  
side facing up)  
(with the printing  
side facing up)  
1-sided  
printing*2  
(with the printing  
side facing down)  
(with the printing  
side facing down)  
Automatic  
2-sided  
printing  
(with the front side  
facing down)  
(with the front side  
facing down)  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Paper Size and Type  
Whenever you change the paper size and type loaded in the  
drawer and the tray, follow the procedure in this section to  
adjust the paper size and type settings.  
5
Select the paper type using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Paper Type  
IMPORTANT  
If the setting is different from the size of the loaded  
paper  
Plain (16 lb Bond-23  
Plain L (16 lb Bond...  
Recycled  
An error message appears, or printing is not performed correctly.  
Color  
6
Press [  
<Select Paper> screen.  
] (Select Paper/Settings) to close the  
For the Paper Drawer  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Setting a Custom Paper Size  
You can register sizes and types of frequently used paper.  
Multi-purpose tray  
-
When <Register Default Set.> is <Off> (default)  
The screen to be displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-  
purpose tray  
OK  
Select Paper/Settings  
Paper Size (MP Tray)  
1. 5 x 9 "  
LTR  
LGL  
1
2
Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings).  
STMT  
Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
-
When <Register Default Set.> is <ON>  
Paper Size Setting Screen  
Select Paper  
MP Tray  
Paper Size  
1. 5 x 9 "  
LTR  
1
LTR:Plain  
Paper Settings  
LGL  
STMT  
3
4
Select < Drawer 1> or < Drawer 2> using [ ] or  
[
] and press [OK].  
< Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper drawer  
(Drawer 2) is installed.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings).  
Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Drawer 2  
Register Custom Paper  
Select Paper  
MP Tray  
1
LTR:Plain  
Paper Settings  
Select a paper size using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
3
Select <Register Custom Paper> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Paper Size  
LTR  
LGL  
EXEC  
FOOLSCAP  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Register Custom Paper  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Registering the Default Paper Settings  
for the Multi-purpose Tray  
4
5
Select <Not Registered> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
If you want to always load the same paper in the multi-  
purpose tray, register the default paper using the following  
procedure.  
When selecting the registered custom paper, you can edit and  
delete the custom paper.  
Register Custom Paper  
1. Not Registered  
2. Not Registered  
3. Not Registered  
NOTE  
If the default paper is registered  
The setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings).  
Specify the size of <X: “> direction and <Y: “>  
direction.  
Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(1) Select the direction using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Specify Size  
Select Paper  
MP Tray  
<Apply>  
X: 0 "  
Y: 0 "  
X
1
LTR:Plain  
Y
Paper Settings  
(2) Specify the size using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.  
3
Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Set Length for X  
3_0/0 "  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
(3-8_1/2)  
Register Custom Paper  
(3) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Specify Size  
4
5
Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
<Apply>  
X: 3 "  
Y: 5 "  
X
Register Default Set.  
Off  
On  
Y
Set Details  
6
7
Select the paper type using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Paper Type  
Plain (16 lb Bond-23  
Plain L (16 lb Bond...  
Recycled  
Select Paper  
LTR:Plain  
Color  
1
LTR:Plain  
Paper Settings  
Press [  
<Select Paper> screen.  
] (Select Paper/Settings) to close the  
6
Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Paper Settings  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
Register Custom Paper  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
8
Select <Set Details> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press[OK].  
Register Default Set.  
Off  
On  
Set Details  
Select a paper size using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
*
To register a custom paper, see“Setting a Custom Paper Size”  
*
The registered custom paper is listed at the top.  
Select it with [ ].  
Paper Size  
LTR  
LGL  
STMT  
EXEC  
If you select <Custom Size>  
Specify the size of <X:> direction and <Y:> direction of the  
custom paper.  
(1) Select the direction using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Specify Size  
<Apply>  
X: 0 "  
Y: 0 "  
X
Y
(2) Specify the size using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.  
Set Length for X  
3_0/0 "  
(3-8_1/2)  
(3) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Specify Size  
<Apply>  
X: 3 "  
Y: 5 "  
X
Y
9
Select the paper type using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Paper Type  
Plain (16 lb Bond-23  
Plain L (16 lb Bond...  
Recycled  
Color  
10 Press [  
] (Select Paper/Settings) to close the  
<Select Paper> screen.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Print Side  
Specify whether to print only on the front side of paper for  
1-sided printing so that the odd pages are always  
printed on the front side for both 1-sided and 2-sided printing.  
The print side for 1-sided printing varies depending on the  
setting specified. To use preprinted paper, read  
paper stack in the correct orientation.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Select <Common Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Menu  
IMPORTANT  
Preferences  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Paper Size and Paper Type  
If you select unsupported paper size or paper type for 2-sided  
printing, the settings applied in this section will be invalid.  
3
4
5
Select <Switch Paper Feed Method> using [ ] or  
When <Print Speed Priority> is selected  
(the default setting)  
[
] and press [OK].  
Common Settings  
Drawer Auto Selection  
Switch Paper Feed Met  
All pages (odd and even) are printed on the back side for  
1-sided printing while the odd pages are printed on the first  
side for 2-sided printing, as shown below.  
* Make sure to place the stack correctly to use preprinted  
paper, as the side to be placed face up varies between  
1-sided and 2-sided printing.  
Select the paper source using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Front Back  
1-sided  
printing  
Paper Feed Method  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Drawer 1  
2-sided  
printing  
Select this setting when  
• using paper types other than preprinted paper  
• using preprinted paper only for 1-sided printing  
Select <Print Speed Priority> or <Print Side  
Priority> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
When <Print Side Priority> is selected  
Multi-Purpose Tray  
Print Speed Priority  
Print Side Priority  
All pages are printed on the first side for 1-sided printing so  
the odd pages are always printed on the first side for both  
1-sided and 2-sided printing, as shown below.  
* The side to be placed face up is the same between 1-sided  
and 2-sided printing, even when using preprinted paper.  
Front Back  
1-sided  
printing  
2-sided  
printing  
Select this setting when  
• using preprinted paper for both 1-sided and 2-sided  
printing  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Place the paper stack as shown below when <Print  
Speed Priority> is selected.  
(
: Feeding direction)  
* For details on the procedure for loading paper  
when using multi-purpose tray or when printing  
pages of the landscape layout, seePaper Loading  
For 1-sided printing  
Place the stack with  
the printed side face the front side (first  
down. page) face up.  
For 2-sided printing  
Place the stack with  
<Print  
Speed  
Priority>  
Place the paper stack as shown below when <Print  
Side Priority> is selected.  
(
: Feeding direction)  
* For details on the procedure for loading paper  
when using multi-purpose tray or when printing  
pages of the landscape layout, seePaper Loading  
The side to be placed face up is the same  
between 1-sided and 2-sided printing.  
• Place the stack with the printed side face  
up for 1-sided printing.  
<Print Side  
Priority>  
• Place the stack with the front side (first  
page) face up for 2-sided printing.  
6
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Copying  
This chapter describes how to use the copy functions.  
Basic Copy Operations  
3-2  
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs  
3-3  
3-3  
Canceling a copy job using [  
] (Stop)  
Checking and canceling a copy job using [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) 3-3  
Copy Settings  
3-4  
Selecting Copy Papers  
3-4  
3-5  
3-5  
Adjusting the Density  
Selecting the Document Type  
Copy Settings  
3-6  
2-Sided Copying  
3-6  
3-7  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies  
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)  
Collating Copies  
3-7  
3-8  
3-8  
3-8  
Erasing Dark Borders or Frame Lines ( Frame Erase)  
Emphasizing the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)  
Copying an ID Card  
3-9  
Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings  
(Mode Memory)  
3-10  
Registering Mode Memory  
Deleting Mode Memory  
3-10  
3-10  
3-11  
Calling and Copying Mode Memory  
Changing the Default Settings  
Viewing Copy Settings  
3-12  
3-12  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Copy Operations  
This section describes the basic procedure for copying.  
Place your document.  
1
*
Up to 50 documents can be loaded into the feeder.  
Press [  
].  
Enter the copy quantity (1 to 99) using numeric  
2
3
4 keys.  
*
Press [  
] (Clear) to cancel the entered quantity.  
Specify the copy settings as needed.  
You can specify up to 9 items.  
Press [  
] (Start).  
5
Paper select  
Density  
N on 1  
Collating  
Document Type  
2-Sided  
Frame erase  
Sharpness  
Enlarging/Reducing  
NOTE  
Copy Settings  
When you combine multiple settings for use, see“Combination of  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current operation.  
To make the settings effective for all the copy operations, see  
Register your frequently used settings into the Mode Memory. It is  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs  
4
Select a job using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Check the details of copy jobs. Cancel copy jobs that you  
decide not to perform while the jobs are processing.  
The details of the selected job is displayed.  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0020  
Status: Printing  
Time: 01/01 09:42AM  
NOTE  
When the processing/Data indicator on the operation  
panel is:  
Turned on/blinking A job is currently processing.  
Turned off  
No jobs are waiting in memory.  
To cancel the job  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Details  
Canceling a copy job using [  
Press [ ] (Stop).  
] (Stop)  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0001  
Status: Copying  
Time: 01/01 12:52AM  
1
2
3
*
Press [  
] (Stop) twice to cancel the job when the machine  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
The job is canceled.  
holds one job only.  
Select the job that you want to cancel when more  
than one job is processing using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Cancel?  
Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] when <Cancel?>  
appears and press [OK].  
Yes  
No  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
Or, press [  
] (Stop) to cancel the job.  
The job is canceled.  
To only check the details of the selected job  
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the  
details of the selected job to close the screen.  
Cancel?  
<No>  
<Yes>  
Details  
*
Select <Details> using [ ] or [ ] to check the details of the  
job that you want to cancel and press [OK].  
Checking and canceling a copy job using [  
(Status Monitor/Cancel)  
]
1
2
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
Select <Copy/Print Job> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
RX Job  
3
Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Copy/Print Job  
Job Status  
Copy Job History  
Print Job History  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy Settings  
Combination of Copy Settings  
You can combine and use various copy settings.  
This applies to Mode Memory registration and default settings (P. 3-12) as well.  
However, the following limitation is found in the setting combination.  
<No. of Copies> Nothing special.  
<Density>  
When <Background> is set to <Auto>, <Original Type> is changed to <Text>.  
If <Original Type> is set other than <Text> when <Background> is set to <Auto>, the <Auto> setting in <Background>  
will be cancelled.  
<Original Type>  
• Depending on its paper size (selected paper drawer), 2-sided copy is not available.  
• Depending on its paper size or paper type in the selected paper source, 2-sided copy is not available.  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types”  
<2-Sided>  
• This feature cannot be combined with <ID Card Copy>.  
• When you want to copy documents in a reduction ratio different from its default setting for <4 on 1>/<2 on 1>, secify  
the <Copy Ratio> later.  
• <Copy Ratio> is fixed at 100 % for <ID Card Copy>.  
<Copy Ratio>  
<Paper>  
• The frame width specified at <Erase Frame> increases/decreases according to the <Copy Ratio> setting.  
Depending on its paper size (selected paper source), 2-sided copy is not available.  
<4 on 1>/  
<2 on 1>  
• If you want to copy a document in a copy ratio different from its default reduction ratio, specify the <Copy Ratio> later.  
• This feature cannot be combined with <Erase Frame>.  
• <Copy Ratio> is fixed at 100%.  
• This feature cannot be combined with either 2-Sided Copy or <Erase Frame>.  
<ID Card Copy>  
<Collate>  
Nothing special.  
• This feature cannot be combined with N on 1 (<4 on 1> / <2 on 1>, <ID Card Copy>).  
• The specified erase frame width increases/decreases according to the <Copy Ratio> setting.  
<Erase Frame>  
<Sharpness>  
Nothing special.  
Selecting Copy Papers  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
Select Paper  
Copy: Press Start  
Select Paper/  
Setting  
1
1
LTR:Plain  
LTR:Plain  
Paper Settings  
*
You can display the setting  
screen also by selecting  
<Paper> in the copy mode  
screen.  
100%  
LTR  
1
2-Sided: Off  
Copy Ratio: 100% Di...  
Paper:1 LTR:Plain  
Select the paper drawer using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copy Settings  
Adjusting the Density  
Copy mode screen  
Density adjustment  
Copy: Press Start  
Setting screen  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
+
Density  
-
Background: Default  
Density: 0  
-
Decrease the  
density.  
+
[
[
]
]
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
Increase the  
density.  
Select <Density> using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Adjust the density using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Background Adjustment  
Setting screen  
Manual adjustment  
Density  
-
Background: Default  
(1) Select <Adjustment> using  
+
[] or [] [OK]  
Background  
Auto  
Adjustment  
Select <Background> using  
[] or [] [OK]  
(2) Adjust background color  
Automatic adjustment  
using[ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Adjustment  
Select <Auto> using [] or []  
[OK]  
Background  
Auto  
-
+
Adjustment  
Makes the background  
density lighter.  
[
[
]
]
Makes the background  
density darker.  
Selecting the Document Type  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen  
Original Type  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Text/Photo (Quality)  
Photo  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
+
Density: 0  
-
Original Type: Text/  
2-Sided: Off  
Select <Original Type> using  
Select the appropriate document type  
using [] or [][OK]  
[
] or [ ] [OK]  
When selecting <Text/Photo (Quality)>  
Adjust priority using [ ] or [ ][OK]  
<Text>  
Best suited for text-only documents.  
Suited for documents that contain text and  
photos.  
<Text/Photo>  
Adjust Level  
Text Priority  
Photo Priority  
Suited for documents that contain text  
and photos. You can set its priority, text or  
photos.  
<Text/Photo  
(Quality)>  
Suited for documents that contain magazine  
photos.  
<Photo>  
Prioritize text readability.  
[
[
]
]
Prioritize illustration readability  
such as photos.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy Settings  
* You can display the setting screen  
also by selecting <2-Sided> in the  
copy mode screen.  
2-Sided Copying  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen*  
2-Sided  
2-Sided  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
Off  
100%  
LTR  
+
1 2-Sided  
2 2-Sided  
2 1-Sided  
Density: 0  
Original Type: Text/  
2-Sided: Off  
-
Select the 2-Sided copy format using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Copy a 1-sided document onto both sides of the output.  
You can make 2-sided copies from 2-sided documents.  
You can make 1-sided copies from 2-sided documents.  
<12-sided>  
<22-sided>  
<21-sided>  
If you want to specify how to open document or copy  
(4) Select how to open the original document  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(1) Select <Format Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Original Format  
Book Type  
2-Sided  
1 2-Sided  
2 2-Sided  
2 1-Sided  
Format Settings  
Calendar Type  
(5) Select how to open the output using [ ] or  
(2) Select <2->2-Sided> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
[
] and press [OK].  
Finishing Format  
Book Type  
Format Settings  
1 2-Sided  
Calendar Type  
2 2-Sided  
2 1-Sided  
(3) Select the orientation of the original document  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Original Orientation  
Portrait  
Landscape  
To copy a document by placing on the platen glass  
(2) Select <Start Copying> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(1) Place the next page and press [  
* Repeat this step until all pages are scanned.  
] (Start).  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Copying>  
<Cancel>  
SheetxCopy:1x1  
+
Density: 0  
-
Notes on 2-Sided copying  
Accurately attach the paper size switch lever. If the paper size switch lever is not securely attached,  
documents may not be fed properly or jammed.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy Settings  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies  
Copy mode screen  
Enlarge or reduce copies using preset  
copy ratios or custom copy ratios. For  
example, you can copy Statement to  
Letter size paper using a preset ratio,  
or set any copy ratio from 25% to  
400% in 1% increments.  
Setting screen  
Copy Ratio  
Custom Ratio  
100% Direct  
400% Max  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
Original Type: Text...  
2-Sided: Off  
200%  
Copy Ratio: 100% Dir  
Select <Copy Ratio> using [ ] or [  
[OK]  
]
Select the copy ratio using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
To set a copy ratio in 1% increments  
(1) Select <Custom Ratio> using [ ] or [  
[OK]  
]
(2) Specify the ratio using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
You can also enter the copy ratio using the numeric Keys  
for D1370/D1350.  
Copy Ratio  
Custom Ratio  
100% Direct  
400% Max  
Custom Ratio  
100 %  
200%  
(25-400)  
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen  
N on 1  
Off  
2 on 1  
4 on 1  
ID Card Copy  
Copy: Press Start  
Copy two pages  
onto one sheet.  
1
1
<2 on 1>  
<4 on 1>  
100%  
LTR  
Copy Ratio: 100% Di...  
Copy four pages  
onto one sheet.  
1
Paper:  
LTR:Plain  
N on 1: Off  
Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> using [] or [][OK]  
Select <N on 1> using [] or [][OK]  
About margins on the document  
To copy in the N on 1 mode, margins are  
created on the output.  
Scan Size  
LTR  
LGL  
To specify the layout  
(1) Select <Select Layout> using [] or []  
[OK]  
STMT  
(2) Select the layout using [] or [] [OK]  
Select the size of the document using [] or [][OK]  
Select Layout  
2 on 1 (1)  
2 on 1 (2)  
4 on 1 (1)  
4 on 1 (2)  
Output Size  
LTR:Plain  
1
LTR:Plain  
When your document is placed on  
the platen glass  
(1) Set the next document and press [  
(Start).  
]
Select a output size using [] or [][OK]  
(2) Select <Start Copying> using [] or []  
and press [OK].  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Copying>  
<Cancel>  
SheetxCopy:1x1  
+
Density: 0  
-
*
Repeat these steps until all documents are scanned.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy Settings  
Collating Copies  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen  
Collate  
Off  
On  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
1
Paper:  
LTR:Plain  
N on 1: Off  
Collate: Off  
Select <Collate> using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Printouts of a complete job are grouped.  
For example, if you are copying three copies of a three-page  
document, printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged  
in this page order:1, 1, 1,2, 2, 2,3, 3, 3.”  
<Off>  
<On>  
Printouts of a complete job are collated.  
For example, if you are copying three copies of a three-page  
document, printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged  
in this page order:1, 2, 3,1, 2, 3,1, 2, 3.”  
Erasing Dark Borders or Frame Lines ( Frame Erase)  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen  
Erase Frame  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
Off  
On  
100%  
LTR  
N on 1: Off  
Collate: On  
Erase Frame: Off  
Select <Erase Frame> using [ ] or [  
[OK]  
]
Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
Scan Size  
LTR  
Specify Frame Width  
0_1/8 "  
LGL  
STMT  
(1/16-1_15/16)  
Select the frame width to be erased using  
Select the size of the original document  
using [ ] or [ ] [OK]  
[
] or [ ] [OK].  
* You can also enter the frame width to be  
erased using the numeric keys.  
Emphasizing the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)  
Copy mode screen  
Setting screen  
Sharpness  
-
To clearly capture halftone photos,  
adjust this setting to the appropriate  
level on the <-> scale. This can  
counteract the effect of moiré patterns  
(uneven gradation and striped patterns).  
Copy: Press Start  
[
]
1
1
100%  
LTR  
Collate: On  
Erase Frame: Off  
+
To clearly capture text or lines, adjust  
this setting to the appropriate level on  
the <+> scale. It is best suited for  
copying blueprints and very weak  
pencil manuscripts.  
+
Sharpness: 0  
-
[
]
Select <Sharpness> using [ ] or  
] [OK]  
Adjust the sharpness using [  
or [ ][OK]  
]
[
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying an ID Card  
Copy a 2-sided card onto one side of paper.  
5
6
Press [  
] (Start).  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Proceed to the next step when the scan is complete.  
COPY  
Turn sides.  
Place the card with spacing of 1/4(5 mm) from the left edge of the  
platen glass.  
Align the center of the card with the arrow mark, as shown below.  
To place the card  
horizontally  
A4  
OK  
Start  
B4  
A5  
1
Place a card on the platen glass, and then close  
the feeder.  
A5  
B4  
A4  
Place the card with spacing of 1/4(5 mm) from the left edge of the  
platen glass.  
Align the center of the card with the arrow mark, as shown below.  
To place the card  
A4  
B4  
vertically  
A5  
To place the card  
A4  
B4  
horizontally  
A5  
A5  
B4  
A4  
A5  
B4  
A4  
7
Press [  
] (Start).  
To place the card vertically  
A4  
B4  
A5  
NOTE  
To place your document (card) on the platen glass  
Place the card on the left half of the platen glass.  
A5  
B4  
A4  
Copy ratio  
The copy ratio is automatically set to <100%>.  
Supported paper sizes  
Sizes larger than A4/Letter.  
2
3
Press [  
].  
Select <N on 1> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
Copy Ratio: 100% Di...  
1
Paper:  
LTR:Plain  
N on 1: Off  
4
Select <ID Card Copy> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
N on 1  
Off  
2 on 1  
4 on 1  
ID Card Copy  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings (Mode Memory)  
You can register up to four combinations of frequently used  
copy settings to theMode memoryin advance.  
5
Select items to specify using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
IMPORTANT  
Registered settings of Mode Memory  
Mode 1  
Registered settings in the Mode Memory are saved even during  
<Apply>  
power OFF.  
<Delete>  
When settings which require the options are registered in a  
Mode Memory, the memory becomes unavailable if that option  
is removed, but its settings remain saved.  
No. of Copies: 1  
+
Density: 0  
-
For details on the settings, see“Copy Settings(P. 3-4).  
When an optional drawer usage is registered in a Mode Memory,  
the paper feeding setting is changed to Drawer 1 if that optional  
drawer is removed.  
6
7
Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] after you have  
specified the setting and press [OK].  
Registering Mode Memory  
Mode 1  
<Apply>  
<Delete>  
No. of Copies: 1  
Keys to be used for this operation  
COPY  
+
Density: 0  
-
Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Register?  
OK  
Yes  
No  
1
2
Press [  
].  
*
Follow the same steps for overwriting settings as well.  
Select <Mode Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Deleting Mode Memory  
Copy: Press Start  
Keys to be used for this operation  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
COPY  
Erase Frame: Off  
+
Sharpness: 0  
-
Mode Memory: Off  
3
4
Select <Register/Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
OK  
Mode Memory  
Register/Delete  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
1
2
Press [  
].  
Select <Mode Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Select the place to register using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
*
Select any registered place, then you can edit settings.  
Erase Frame: Off  
+
Sharpness: 0  
Register/Delete  
Mode 1  
-
Mode Memory: Off  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Mode 4  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Select <Register/Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
3
4
Select <Mode Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Mode Memory  
Register/Delete  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Copy: Press Start  
1
1
100%  
LTR  
Erase Frame: Off  
+
Sharpness: 0  
-
Mode Memory: Off  
Select a Mode Memory to delete using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Select a Mode Memory to call using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
*
From Mode 1 to Mode 4, you cannot select any Mode Memory  
Register/Delete  
Mode 1  
which is not registered.  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Mode Memory  
Mode 1  
Mode 4  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Mode 4  
5
6
Select <Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
5
Press [  
] (Start).  
Mode 1  
<Apply>  
<Delete>  
No. of Copies: 1  
+
Density: 0  
-
Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Delete?  
Yes  
No  
Calling and Copying Mode Memory  
NOTE  
Calling Mode Memory  
When a new Mode Memory is called, all copy settings are  
replaced with that Mode Memory settings.  
After the Mode Memory is called, you can change and copy the  
settings as you like.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
COPY  
OK  
Start  
1
2
Place your document.  
Press [  
].  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Default Settings  
The default settings are a set of standard settings  
predetermined by the machine. These settings become  
effective when the machine is turned OFF and ON, or when  
3
Select <Change Defaults> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
[
] (Reset) is pressed to revert to the default settings. You  
Copy Settings  
Change Defaults  
can change the following default settings based on your  
needs.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
4
5
Select the item using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
No. of Copies: 1  
+
Density: 0  
-
Original Type: Text...  
OK  
For more information, see“Copy Settings(P. 3-4).  
1
2
Press [ ] (Menu).  
Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] after you have  
specified the setting and press [OK].  
Select <Copy Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
No. of Copies: 1  
+
Density: 0  
-
Original Type: Text...  
Menu  
Preferences  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
6
2
Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Viewing Copy Settings  
Check your settings.  
You can confirm the settings of copy function which have been  
changed from the default setting.  
NOTE  
Keys to be used for this operation  
You can change those settings  
Select items and press [OK] to display a setting screen for those  
items, where you can change those settings.  
3
Press [ ] (Back) to return to the standby display.  
Back View Settings  
1
Press [ ] (View Settings).  
The current settings in the machine are displayed.  
*
If you have not changed the default settings, the message <No  
settings have been changed.> is displayed.  
View Settings  
Density: +1  
Original Type: Text/...  
Sharpness: +1  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter  
4
Printing from a Computer  
This chapter describes how to print from your computer to the machine.  
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the following.  
• To view how to install the Printer Driver  
Starter Guide or Printer Driver Installation Guide  
• To view how to use each function  
Print Driver’s Help  
To view how to display Printer Driver Installation Guide or Help in the Printer Driver,  
Preparing to Print from Your Computer  
4-2  
4-3  
Printing from a Computer  
Scaling Documents  
4-3  
4-3  
4-4  
4-5  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing  
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparing to Print from Your Computer  
To print your documents files from your computer, perform the following steps.  
Choose between USB and network connections.  
Install the printer driver.  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Starter Guide 4 Connecting to a Computer and  
Installing the Drivers  
NOTE  
To change the port number of the machine  
See the following section.  
e-ManualSecurityRestricting Network ConnectionsSetting Protocol Port Numbers  
Change printer settings on your computer when changing the port number of the machine.  
e-ManualNetwork SettingsSetting Up Your Computer to Print and Send Faxes (Windows Only)Configuring Printer Settings on Your  
Computer  
About the printer driver  
The printer driver is software required for printing from an application. The printer driver will convert application software’s print data to print data  
for the printer.  
The printer driver for this machine has the following features.  
The printer driver for this machine enables you to output print data at an optimum speed by dividing the workload using a computer and the  
printer.  
As well as providing faster and more stable printing than conventional models, the printer driver for this machine uses less memory to operate.  
In addition to the conversion of print data, the printer driver for this machine is equipped with the functions capable of spooling print data and  
configuring the print condition, and various types of print finishing can be set such as scaling or gutter adjustment.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing from a Computer  
4
5
If you want to increase or decrease the  
magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling]  
specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].  
Scaling Documents  
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output  
paper size.  
There are two methods for scaling a document:  
select the output size of the document to scale it  
automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.  
1
Click [Page Setup].  
Click [OK].  
NOTE  
Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are  
using, you may not be able to magnify the document.  
Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not  
be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the  
selected page size.  
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well  
as the type and version of the printer driver.  
NOTE  
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see  
“PrintingorConfiguring the Default Print Settingsin the e-Manual.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
2
Select paper size of the document you created in  
the application from [Page Size].  
Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.  
1
Click [Page Setup].  
3
Select output size of the document from [Output  
Size].  
NOTE  
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see  
“PrintingorConfiguring the Default Print Settingsin the e-Manual.  
The document is scaled automatically according to the settings  
made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Select [N on 1] from [Page Layout] (where “N” is  
the number of pages you want to print on the  
sheet).  
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing  
You can select whether to print on one side or both sides of  
each sheet of paper. If the machine you are using supports  
2-sided printing, the default setting is 2-sided printing.  
IMPORTANT  
Precautions on 2-sided printing  
Do not touch your document when making 2-sided printing  
until the process is complete. After printing on the front side is  
complete, the document is partially output, reserved, and fed  
into the machine again for printing on the back side.  
Be sure to close the sub-output tray before making 2-sided  
printing.  
Printing to the back side of printed document  
(Manual 2-sided printing)  
2-sided printing can be performed manually using a printed  
document. Place a printed document in the multi-purpose tray to  
print on the back side*.  
To print on the back side of a printed document, smooth out the  
curling edges of the sheets and place them one by one in the  
multi-purpose tray.  
NOTE  
If you cannot select the options for [Page Layout], display the  
[Device Settings] sheet, and then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from  
[Spooling at Host]. For instructions on how to display the [Device  
Settings] sheet, seeSetting the Printer Options”in the e-Manual.  
* This feature is supported only for sheets printed from this  
machine. You cannot make a print on the printed side again.  
3
Select the page order from [Page Order].  
1
According to the paper size for 2-sided printing,  
ensure to set the paper size switch lever  
accurately.  
*
If not securely attached, documents may not be fed properly, or  
jammed.  
(1) Open the lower rear cover.  
The output image is displayed in the preview area.  
4
Click [OK].  
(2) Securely place the blue color paper size switch lever (A).  
NOTE  
• A4:  
Pull  
You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this  
• Letter, Legal: Push  
function.  
Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies  
depending on the application you are using, do not use it  
together with this function. If you do, printing may not be  
executed correctly.  
(A)  
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well  
as the type and version of the printer driver.  
(A)  
(3) Close the lower rear cover.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Click [Finishing].  
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs  
You can check detailed information about print jobs or cancel  
print jobs in the middle of currently printing or waiting.  
NOTE  
If the Processing/Data Indicator on the operation panel  
is:  
Turned on/blinking A job is being processed.  
Turned off  
No jobs are in the memory.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
NOTE  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen,  
seePrintingorConfiguring the Default Print Settingsin the  
e-Manual.  
3
Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].  
OK  
1
2
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
Select <Copy/Print Job> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
4
Select the binding edge from [Binding Location].  
RX Job  
3
4
Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Copy/Print Job  
Job Status  
Copy Job History  
Print Job History  
Select a job to be checked or canceled using [  
or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
The output image is displayed in the preview area.  
5
Click [OK].  
Copy/Print Job Status  
09:42AM Printing  
09:43AM Waiting  
NOTE  
The page sizes for which 2-sided printing is available differ  
according to printer model. For details, view the online help.  
The display may differ according to the operating system, as well  
as the type and version of the printer driver.  
The detailed information is displayed.  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0020  
Status: Printing  
Time: 01/01 09:42AM  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For canceling  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0020  
Status: Printing  
Time: 01/01 09:42AM  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
The print job is canceled.  
Cancel?  
Yes  
No  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
NOTE  
Pressing [  
You can delete the print job also by pressing [  
] (Stop) can also delete the print jobs  
] (Stop).  
*
Press [  
] (Stop) twice to cancel the job when the machine  
holds one job only.  
For checking only  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
5
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
(D1370/D1350 Only)  
This chapter describes the procedures for registering destinations in the address book and  
changing or deleting the registered settings.  
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
5-2  
One-touch keys  
Coded dial  
5-2  
5-2  
5-2  
Group dialing  
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys  
5-3  
Registering and Editing from the Operation Panel  
5-3  
5-5  
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys using the Remote UI  
Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes  
5-6  
Registering and Editing from the Operation Panel  
5-6  
5-8  
Registering and Editing a Coded Dial Code Using the Remote UI  
Registering and Editing Destinations for Group  
Dialing  
5-9  
Registering and Editing a Destination Group from the Operation  
Panel  
5-9  
Registering and Editing a Destination Group Using the Remote UI 5-12  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
Specify a destination by manually entering characters/  
numbers using the numeric keys or selecting from the address  
book to fax a document.  
You can register frequently used destinations in one-touch  
keys and coded dial codes.  
You can also save one-touch keys and coded dial codes as a  
group.  
You can register destinations from the operation panel or  
Remote UI.  
One-touch keys  
You can register up to 19 destinations in one-touch keys.  
Once the destinations have been registered, you can press the  
appropriate one-touch key to select the destination.  
Coded dial  
You can register up to 181 destinations in coded dial codes.  
Once the destinations have been registered, you can press the  
appropriate coded dial code to select the destination.  
Group dialing  
You can specify up to 199 registered destinations as a group  
address in one-touch keys and coded dial codes. Group  
addresses need to be registered in unused one-touch keys or  
coded dial codes. All you need to do is to select a key or code  
to specify group addresses.  
NOTE  
Saving/Reading the address book  
The address book can be saved as a file to your computer using the  
Remote UI. The machine can read the file saved to your computer.  
e-ManualSetting and Managing from ComputerImport/  
Export the Settings  
You cannot edit the address book saved as a file.  
Viewing destinations registered in the address book  
You can view destinations by printing destination lists.  
e-ManualBasic OperationPrinting the ListPrinting the  
Address Book List (D1370/D1350 Only)  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys  
You can perform the following tasks.  
• Registering one-touch keys  
• Editing one-touch keys  
(5) Select the number to be registered using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Enter Registration No.  
01 Not Registered  
02 Not Registered  
03 Not Registered  
04 Not Registered  
• Deleting one-touch keys  
Registering and Editing from the  
Operation Panel  
(6) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Fax  
Tone,  
Numeric keys  
Address Book  
FAX SCAN  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name:  
Destination:  
(7) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.  
OK  
Back  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
1
2
Press [  
] or [  
].  
Press [ ] (Address Book).  
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To register a new one-touch key  
(1) When destinations are already registered in the one-  
touch key, press [ ].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
To register a destination for the first time, proceed to Step  
(2).  
Entry Mode: A  
(2) Select <Register New Destination to Address Book> using  
[
] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(9) Select <Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Fax  
Address Book Details  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON  
Destination:  
All A-Z  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(10) Use the numeric keys to specify <Destination>.  
If you select <Fax> in Step 4, press [OK] to specify <Set  
Details> if necessary.  
Address Book PIN  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
Set Details  
(3) Select <One-Touch> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Register Location  
Coded Dial  
(11) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
One-Touch  
<Apply>  
Set Details  
(4) Select <Fax> or <E-Mail> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
(12) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Destination Type  
Fax  
E-Mail  
Group  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 012345...  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To edit a one-touch key  
(1) Press [ ].  
(2) Select <Delete From Address Book> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Delete From Address  
All A-Z  
All A-Z  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
Address Book PIN  
Register New Destin...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
*******  
All A-Z  
(Apply: Press OK)  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(3) Select the destination that you want to delete using [  
or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
Address Book PIN  
CANON 0123456789  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
All A-Z 0-9  
(3) Select the destination that you want to edit using [ ] or  
(4) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
[
] and press [OK].  
Delete from  
Address Book?  
CANON 0123456789  
Yes  
No  
All A-Z 0-9  
3
Press [ ] (Back) to close the menu screen.  
(4) Select the item that you want to edit using [ ] or [  
]
and press [OK].  
• Type  
• Name  
• Destination  
• One-Touch  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 0123456  
(5) When the edit is complete, select <Apply> using [ ] or  
] and press [OK].  
[
(6) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 012345...  
To delete a one-touch key  
(1) Press [ ].  
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
All A-Z  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To register a one-touch key  
Proceed to Step 6.  
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys  
using the Remote UI  
To edit the registered one-touch key  
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
(2) Click [Edit].  
1
2
Start the Web browser.  
(3) Specify the required settings in the edit screen and click [OK].  
Enter “http://IP address of the machine/” in the  
address field and press the [ENTER] key on the  
keyboard.  
To delete the registered one-touch key  
(1) Click [Delete] of the destination which you want to delete.  
Input Example:http://192.168.0.215/”  
6
7
Click the unregistered [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
3
Log on to the Remote UI.  
(1) Select [Management Mode].  
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
(3) Click [Log In].  
(1)  
(2)  
Select [Destination Type to Register] and click  
[OK].  
(3)  
4
5
Click [Address Book].  
8
Specify the required settings and click [OK].  
Click [One-Touch].  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes  
You can perform the following tasks.  
• Registering coded dial codes  
• Editing coded dial codes  
(5) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name:  
• Deleting coded dial codes  
Destination:  
Registering and Editing from the  
Operation Panel  
(6) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Tone,  
Numeric keys  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
Address Book  
FAX SCAN  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
(7) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
OK  
Back  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
1
2
Press [  
] or [  
].  
Press [ ] (Address Book).  
(8) Select <Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To register a new coded dial code  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON  
Destination:  
(1) When destinations are already registered in the coded  
dial code, press [ ].  
To register a destination for the first time, proceed to Step  
(2).  
(2) Select <Register New Destination to Address Book> using  
[
] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(9) Use the numeric keys to specify <Destination>.  
If you selected <Fax> in Step 4, press [OK] to specify <Set  
Details> if necessary.  
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
All A-Z  
Set Details  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(10) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Address Book PIN  
Destination (Max 40)  
0123456789  
<Apply>  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
Set Details  
(3) Select <Coded Dial> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(11) Select <Coded Dial> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Register Location  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
Fax  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 012345...  
Coded Dial: 001  
(4) Select <Fax> or <E-Mail> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
(12) Select the number to be registered using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Destination Type  
Fax  
E-Mail  
Group  
Enter Registration No.  
001 Not Registered  
002 Not Registered  
003 Not Registered  
004 Not Registered  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To delete a coded dial code  
(1) Press [ ].  
(13) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Name: CANON  
Destination: 012345...  
Address Book Details  
All A-Z  
To edit a coded dial code  
(1) Press [ ].  
(2) Select <Delete From Address Book> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Delete From Address  
All A-Z  
All A-Z  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
Register New Destin...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book PIN  
Address Book Details  
*******  
All A-Z  
(Apply: Press OK)  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(3) Select the destination that you want to delete using [  
or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
Address Book PIN  
CANON 0123456789  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
All A-Z 0-9  
(3) Select the destination that you want to edit using [ ] or  
(4) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
[
] and press [OK].  
Delete from  
Address Book?  
CANON 0123456789  
Yes  
No  
All A-Z 0-9  
(4) Select the item that you want to edit using [ ] or [  
]
3
Press [ ](Back) to close the menu screen.  
and press [OK].  
• Type  
• Name  
• Destination  
• Coded Dial  
Fax  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON02  
Destination: 987654...  
Coded Dial: 002  
(5) When the edit is complete, select <Apply> using [ ] or  
] and press [OK].  
[
(6) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ]and press [OK].  
Fax  
<Apply>  
Type: Fax  
Name: CANON02  
Destination: 987654...  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To register a coded dial  
Proceed to Step 6.  
Registering and Editing a Coded Dial Code  
Using the Remote UI  
To edit the registered coded dial  
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
(2) Click [Edit].  
1
2
Start the Web browser.  
(3) Specify the required settings in the edit screen and click [OK].  
Enter “http://IP address of the machine/” in the  
address field and press the [ENTER] key on the  
keyboard.  
To delete the registered coded dial  
(1) Click [Delete] of the destination which you want to delete.  
Input Example:http://192.168.0.215/”  
6
7
Click the unregistered [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
3
Log on to the Remote UI.  
(1) Select [Management Mode].  
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
(3) Click [Log In].  
Select [Destination Type to Register] and click  
[OK].  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
4
5
Click [Address Book].  
8
Specify the required settings and click [OK].  
Click [Coded Dial].  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing  
You can perform the following tasks.  
• Registering group addresses  
• Adding destination(s) to a group  
• Deleting destination(s) from a group  
• Changing the group name  
• Deleting group(s)  
(3) Select <One-Touch> or <Coded Dial> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Register Location  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
IMPORTANT  
(4) Select <Group> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Before registering group addresses  
Destination Type  
Fax  
E-Mail  
Group  
Register group addresses in unused one-touch keys or coded  
dial codes. Leave some one-touch keys or coded dials unused for  
group dialing.  
Destinations must be registered in one-touch keys or coded dial  
codes before they are added to a group.  
(5) If you selected <One-Touch> in Step (3), select the  
number to be registered using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Registering and Editing a Destination  
Group from the Operation Panel  
Enter Registration No.  
01  
02  
CANON01 01234...  
CANON02 98765...  
03 Not Registered  
04 Not Registered  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Tone,  
Numeric keys  
Address Book  
FAX SCAN  
(6) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Type: Group  
Name:  
Destinations: 0  
OK  
Back  
(7) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.  
1
2
Press [  
] or [  
].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Press [ ] (Address Book).  
Entry Mode: A  
CANON01 012345678  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON03 00112233...  
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
All A-Z  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
To register new group addresses  
(1) Press [ ].  
(2) Select <Register New Destination to Address Book> using  
[
] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(9) Select <Destinations> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Register New Destina  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Group  
<Apply>  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 0  
All A-Z  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(10) Select <Add> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Destination(s)  
<Apply>  
Address Book PIN  
<Add>  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(11) Select the destination that you want to add using [ ] or  
] and press [OK].  
(5) Select <Add> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
[
Destination(s)  
<Apply>  
<Add>  
CANON01 012345678  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON03 00112233...  
CANON01 0123456789  
CANON02 9876543210  
All A-Z 0-9  
(6) Select the destination to be added using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(12) Repeat Steps (10) and (11) to select the destinations to be  
added.  
(13) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
CANON01 01234567...  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON03 001122334  
Destination(s)  
<Apply>  
All A-Z 0-9  
<Add>  
CANON01 0123456789  
CANON02 9876543210  
(7) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Destination(s)  
<Apply>  
(14) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Group  
<Add>  
<Apply>  
CANON01 01234567...  
CANON02 98765432...  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 2  
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 3  
To add destination(s) to a group  
(1) Press [ ].  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Register New Destin...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
To delete destination(s) from a group  
(1) Press [ ].  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
All A-Z  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
Register New Destin...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Address Book PIN  
All A-Z  
*******  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(Apply: Press OK)  
Address Book PIN  
(3) Select the group to be edited using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
*******  
CANON 2 Destinat  
CANON01 0123456...  
CANON02 9876543...  
(Apply: Press OK)  
(3) Select the group to be edited using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
All A-Z 0-9  
(4) Select <Destinations> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
CANON 3 Destinat  
CANON01 0123456...  
CANON02 9876543...  
Group  
<Apply>  
All A-Z 0-9  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 2  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Select the group of which name will be changed using  
(4) Select <Destinations> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
[
] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
CANON 2 Destinat  
CANON01 0123456...  
CANON02 9876543...  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 3  
All A-Z 0-9  
(5) Select the destination to be deleted using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
(4) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Destination(s)  
<Add>  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 2  
CANON01 01234567...  
CANON02 98765432...  
CANON03 001122334  
(5) Change <Name>.  
(6) Select <Delete From Group> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON A  
<Apply>  
Fax  
<Delete From Group>  
Name: CANON03  
Entry Mode: A  
Destination: 0011223...  
Coded Dial: 001  
(6) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(7) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Name (Max 16 char.)  
CANON A  
Delete from group?  
<Apply>  
Entry Mode: A  
Yes  
No  
(7) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Group  
<Apply>  
Destination(s)  
<Apply>  
Type: Group  
Name: CANON A  
Destinations: 2  
<Add>  
CANON01 0123456789  
CANON02 9876543210  
(9) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ]and press [OK].  
To delete group(s)  
(1) Press [ ].  
Group  
<Apply>  
(2) Select <Delete From Address Book> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Type: Group  
Name: CANON  
Destinations: 2  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book Details  
Delete From Address  
To change the name of a group  
(1) Press [ ].  
All A-Z  
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
Register New Destin...  
Edit Address Book  
Address Book PIN  
Address Book Details  
*******  
All A-Z  
(Apply: Press OK)  
When the address book PIN is selected  
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].  
(3) Select the group that you want to delete using [ ] or  
[
] and press [OK].  
Address Book PIN  
CANON 3 Destinat  
CANON01 0123456...  
CANON02 9876543...  
*******  
(Apply: Press OK)  
All A-Z 0-9  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Registering and Editing a Destination  
Group Using the Remote UI  
Delete from  
Address Book?  
1
Start the Web browser.  
Yes  
No  
2
Enter “http://IP address of the machine/” in the  
address field and press the [ENTER] key on the  
keyboard.  
3
Press [ ] (Back) to close the menu screen.  
Input Example:http://192.168.0.215/”  
3
Log on to the Remote UI.  
(1) Select [Management Mode].  
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].  
(3) Click [Log In].  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
4
5
Click [Address Book].  
Click [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial].  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
9
Enter the group name in [Group Name] and click  
[Select from Address Book].  
To register a group dial  
Proceed to Step 6.  
To add destination(s) to the registered group dial  
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
(2) Click [Edit].  
(3) Click [Select from Address Book].  
(4) Click [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-down list  
and click [Display].  
(5) Select the check box of the destination which you want  
to add to the group and click [OK].  
(6) Make sure the destination you registered is displayed in  
[Members List] and click [OK].  
To delete destination(s) from the registered group dial  
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
(2) Click [Edit].  
(3) Select the destination to be deleted from [Members List]  
and click [Delete].  
Select the destination(s) to be registered in this  
group.  
(4) Click [OK].  
To change the name of the registered group dial  
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
(2) Click [Edit].  
(1) Select [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-down  
list and click [Display].  
(3) Change the name of [Group Name] and click [OK].  
(2) Select the check box of the destination which you want  
to register in the group.  
(3) Click [OK].  
To delete the registered group dial  
(1) Click [Delete] of the group dial which you want to delete.  
6
Click the unregistered [No.], [Type] or [Name].  
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
10 Make sure that the destination you registered is  
displayed in [Members List] and click [OK].  
7
Select [Group] in [Destination Type to Register]  
and click [OK].  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
6
Using the Fax Functions  
(D1370/D1350 Only)  
This section describes how to send faxes from the machine and specify the related settings  
to send and receive faxes.  
Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes  
Changing the Scan Settings (Fax)  
6-2  
6-3  
Managing Faxes Stored in Memory  
6-18  
Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs  
6-18  
Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved 6-18  
Resolution Settings  
Density Settings  
2-Sided Original  
Sharpness Settings  
6-3  
6-3  
6-3  
6-3  
Checking and Deleting Received Faxes  
6-19  
6-20  
Checking the History of Received/Sent Faxes  
Changing the Default Fax Settings  
6-21  
Specifying Destinations  
6-4  
Changing Fax Settings (Settings that Can Be Specified Using  
the [Menu] Button)  
6-22  
Specifying destinations by entering the fax number  
Specifying destinations using one-touch keys  
Specifying destinations using coded dial codes  
Specifying destinations using group addresses  
Specifying destinations using the address book  
6-4  
6-4  
6-4  
6-5  
6-5  
The steps to take for configuring the send settings  
6-22  
6-22  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
6-23  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-24  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
6-25  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-26  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-27  
6-28  
6-28  
6-28  
6-28  
6-28  
Options  
Register Unit Telephone Number  
Select Line Type  
Off-Hook Alarm  
Canceling Fax Jobs  
6-6  
6-7  
6-8  
Change Defaults  
Register Unit Name (Fax)  
ECM TX  
Redialing (Manual Redialing)  
Useful Features  
Pause Time  
Auto Redial  
Notifying the Recipient of an Incoming Fax by Telephone (Manual  
Sending)  
Sender ID  
6-8  
6-8  
6-9  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending  
The steps to take for configuring the receiving settings  
Options  
Push-button Telephone for Tone Dialing  
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)  
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time  
ECM RX  
(Sequential Broadcast)  
6-10  
Incoming Ring  
Remote RX  
RX Mode  
6-11  
Auto RX Switch  
RX Mode  
6-11  
6-11  
6-12  
6-13  
6-13  
6-13  
6-14  
6-14  
2-Sided Printing  
Auto mode  
Reduce RX Size  
Fax/Tel mode  
RX Page Footer  
Answer mode  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
The steps to take for configuring the system settings  
Options  
Manual mode  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) mode  
Changing the Receive Mode  
Advanced Settings for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode  
TX Start Speed  
RX Start Speed  
Forwarding Fax Documents  
6-15  
Memory Lock Settings  
Select Country/Region  
Address Book PIN  
Setting Document Transfer (Automatic Forwarding)  
6-15  
Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory to Other Destinations  
Restrict New Destinations  
Allow Fax Driver TX  
Restrict History TX  
(Manual Forwarding)  
6-15  
6-16  
Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors  
Re-fowarding/Printing/Deleting Documents in  
Which Transfer Is Failed  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
6-17  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes  
This section describes the basic procedure for sending faxes.  
Place your document.  
1
Press [  
].  
Specify the destination.  
These are the following methods to specify a destination.  
2
3
4
5
Entering the fax number  
One-touch keys  
Coded dial codes  
Group dialing  
Address book  
Specify the scanning settings as needed.  
There are the three items you can specify.  
(For details, see P.6-3.)  
Press [  
] (Start).  
When your document is placed in the feeder  
The scan starts. Your document is sent to the destination when the  
scan is complete.  
When your document is placed on the platen glass  
Perform the following procedure.  
Resolution  
Density  
(1) Select the size of the original document using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
2-Sided Original  
Sharpness  
Scan Size  
LTR  
LGL  
The settings specified here are effective only for the  
current sending operation. To make the settings  
effective for all the fax operations, see“Changing the  
STMT  
(2) Place the next page on the platen glass and press [  
Press [ ] (Start) for each page.  
] (Start).  
(3) When all documents are scanned completely, select <Start  
Sending> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Your document is sent to your fax destination.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Scan Settings (Fax)  
Resolution Settings  
Fax mode screen  
Setting screen  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
Resolution  
Specify the resolution.  
200 x 100 dpi (Norma  
200 x 200 dpi (Fine)  
200 x 200 dpi (Phot...  
200 x 400 dpi (Supe...  
Higher resolutions result in better image quality  
but require longer transmission times.  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 10  
Select <Resolution> using [ ] or [  
]
For faxes that contain text  
<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>  
<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>  
For faxes that contain fine text  
For faxes that contain photographs  
Achieves an even finer resolution than (Fine)  
Achieves an even finer resolution than (Superfine)  
<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>  
<200 x 400 dpi (Superfine)>  
<400 x 400 dpi (Ultrafine)>  
Density Settings  
Fax mode screen  
Setting screen  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
Density  
Specify the density.  
-
+
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
+
Density: 0  
-
Decrease the density.  
Increase the density.  
[
[
]
]
Select <Density> using [ ] or [  
]
2-Sided Original  
Set the scan settings for 2-sided original documents.  
Specify destination.  
2-Sided Original  
The direction of 2-sided original  
documents are not set.  
<Off>  
<Book Type>  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
Off  
Book Type  
Calendar Type  
Select this setting if the top and  
bottom of the images are the  
same on both pages.  
+
Density: 0  
-
2-Sided Original: 0f  
Select this setting if the top and  
bottom of the images on each  
page are opposite each other.  
<Calendar Type>  
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <2-Sided Original>.  
Sharpness Settings  
Fax mode screen  
Setting screen  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
Sharpness  
-
Adjust this setting to emphasize the outline of  
the image or decrease the contrast.  
+
2-Sided Original: O...  
+
Sharpness: 0  
-
Select <Sharpness> using [ ] or [  
]
To clearly capture halftone photos, adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the <-> scale.  
This can counteract the effect of moiré patterns (uneven gradation and striped patterns).  
[
[
]
]
To clearly capture text or lines, adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the <+> scale. It is best suited for  
scanning blueprints and very weak pencil manuscripts.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifying Destinations  
Specifying Destinations  
Specifying destinations by entering the fax number  
Specify the fax number using the numeric keys, [  
(SYMBOLS).  
] (Tone), and [  
]
To modify destinations  
• To cancel the entered destination  
Press and hold [  
] (Clear).  
• To delete the last character of the entered  
destination  
Press [  
] (Clear).  
Specifying destinations using one-touch keys  
Press the one-touch key (01 to 19) in which the destination is registered.  
To select a destination from the one-touch keys, you need to register  
destinations in these keys in advance.  
When the wrong key is pressed  
(1) Press [  
] (Clear).  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
* To clear all the scan settings specified, press [  
] (Reset).  
Specifying destinations using coded dial codes  
Press [  
] (Coded Dial), and then enter the three-digit registration number  
(001 to 181) with the numeric keys.  
To select a destination from the coded dial codes, you need to register  
destinations in these codes in advance.  
When the wrong key is pressed  
(1) Press [  
] (Clear).  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
* To clear all the scan settings specified, press [  
] (Reset).  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Specifying Destinations  
Specifying destinations using group addresses  
When group addresses are registered in one-touch keys  
Press the one-touch key (01 to 19) in which the group address that you  
want to select is registered.  
When group addresses are registered in coded dial codes  
Press [  
] (Coded Dial), and then enter the three-digit registration number (001 to 181) with the numeric keys.  
To select a destination from the coded dial codes, you need to register  
group addresses in these codes in advance.  
When the wrong key is pressed  
(1) Press [  
] (Clear).  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
* To clear all the scan settings specified, press [  
] (Reset).  
Specifying destinations using the address book  
When you type an alphanumeric character from the operation panel or search for an alphanumeric character in the  
address book screen, fax numbers with the matched letter or number are displayed. You can select your destination from  
the displayed numbers.  
To select a destination from the address book, you need to register destinations in the address book in advance.  
4
Select the destination using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
1
2
3
Press [  
Press [  
]
] (Address Book).  
CANON01 0123456...  
CANON02 9876543...  
CANON03 00112233  
Press [ ] or [ ] to search for your  
destination.  
Select <All> to display all destinations.  
Select < > at the bottom of the screen to add or edit  
destinations.  
All A-Z  
CANON01 01234567  
CANON02 9876543...  
CANON03 0011223...  
All A-Z  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Canceling Fax Jobs  
Cancel sending the job currently being sent.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Stop  
OK  
NOTE  
How to cancel fax sending  
You can also cancel the job with the following procedures.  
To cancel the job in the Status Monitor/Cancel screen.  
Press [  
] (Stop) twice.  
1
When <Scanning...> is displayed after the fax  
sending starts, select <Cancel> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Scanning...  
<Start Sending>  
<Cancel>  
Destinations: 1  
No. of TX Pages: 1  
*
You can also cancel the job by pressing [  
] (Stop).  
When a document is loaded on the platen glass  
When <Scan Next: Press Start> is displayed, follow the same steps  
as the above.  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Sending>  
<Cancel>  
Destinations: 1  
No. of TX Pages: 1  
2
Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] when <Cancel?>  
appears on the screen and press [OK].  
*
You can also cancel the job by pressing [  
] (Stop).  
The job is canceled.  
Cancel?  
<No>  
<Yes>  
Details  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Redialing (Manual Redialing)  
You can call and redial up to three fax sending history.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Recall  
FAX  
OK  
Start  
1
2
Place your document.  
Press [  
Press [  
].  
3
4
] (Recall).  
Select history for redial using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
In the history, recipient name and/or telephone number are  
displayed. For sequential broadcast, only one content is displayed.  
Recall  
012XXXXXX  
5
Press [  
] (Start).  
NOTE  
Contents saved in the fax sending history  
The sequential broadcast destinations are included. The following  
reading settings are saved as well. You can change them for  
redialing.  
Resolution  
Density  
2-Sided Original  
Sharpness  
Redial restrictions  
Manual fax sending is not saved in the history and cannot be  
redialed.  
When fax sending from the history is restricted, redialing feature  
is not available.  
When <Restrict New Dest.> is set to <On>, the saved fax  
sending history up to then is deleted for preventing those new  
destinations in the history from being redialed.  
When the machine is turned OFF  
Recently dialed numbers are all cleared.  
To automatically redial a number  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Useful Features  
Push-button Telephone for Tone Dialing  
Notifying the Recipient of an Incoming  
Fax by Telephone (Manual Sending)  
Some types of push-button telephones require a push-button  
line (for example, banks, airlines, or hotel reservations). When  
the machine is connected to a dial-up line, you can receive a fax  
using tone dialing. Follow the steps in the procedure below.  
Send a fax manually when  
• you want to notify the recipient of an incoming fax by  
telephone  
• the receiving fax machine cannot receive faxes  
automatically  
Keys to be used for this operation  
FAX Tone, Numeric keys  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Numeric keys  
FAX  
Hook  
Start  
Start  
1
2
Press [  
Press [  
].  
] (Hook) and check for the dial tone.  
1
2
Connect an external telephone to the machine.  
For more information, see the Starter Guide that comes with the  
machine.  
Check if you hear the dial tone.  
3
Dial the information service from which you want  
to receive fax(es) using the numeric keys.  
Place your document in the feeder.  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
012XXXXXX  
3
4
Press [  
].  
Start Receiving  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
Specify the scan settings.  
You cannot scan the 2-sided printing document.  
4
Respond to the prerecorded messages of the  
5
Check for a dial tone via the handset of the  
external telephone.  
information service and press [  
] (Tone).  
You can switch to tone dialing.  
Check if you hear the dial tone.  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
012XXXXXXT  
Start Receiving  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
6
7
Dial the recipient’s number.  
Talk to the recipient through the handset.  
When you hear a beep  
Proceed to Step 9.  
5
6
Enter the required numbers using the numeric keys.  
8
9
Ask the recipient to set his/her fax machine to  
receive your fax.  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
012XXXXXXT3456  
Start Receiving  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
When you hear a beep, press [  
hang up the handset.  
] (Start), and  
When the scan is complete, the machine is ready to send your faxes.  
NOTE  
Restrictions when sending faxes manually  
When placing documents on the platen glass, only one page can be  
sent. Furthermore, the group dialing function is not available.  
Press [  
NOTE  
] (Start) to receive fax(es).  
The 2-sided printing document cannot be scanned. (The 2-sided  
printing scan setting will be invalid.)  
To make a telephone call  
An external telephone must be connected to the machine.  
Check for a dial tone before entering the number.  
When the number is entered before checking for a dial tone, your call  
cannot come through or may be connected to a wrong destination.  
Check for a dial tone before entering the number.  
When the number is entered before checking for a dial tone,  
your call cannot come through or may be connected to a wrong  
destination.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)  
7
8
Press [  
] (Pause) to add a pause to the end of  
When making an overseas call, you may need to add a pause  
to the fax number.  
Since signals are transmitted over long distances across a  
complicated channel, your call may not be connected without  
adding a pause after the country code or in front of the fax  
number. By adding a pause, enough time elapses before the  
machine starts dialing the number again.  
the fax/telephone number as needed.  
The letter <P> is displayed at the end of the fax number.  
A pause added to the end of the number is set to 10 seconds.  
Fax Number  
Keys to be used for this operation  
012p031XXXXXXXP  
<Apply>  
FAX Tone, Numeric keys  
Press [  
] (Start).  
Pause  
Start  
1
Place your document.  
2
3
Press [  
].  
Specify the scanning settings as needed.  
4
Enter the international access code using the  
numeric keys.  
For more information on international access codes, contact your  
telephone company.  
Fax Number  
012  
<Apply>  
5
Press [  
] (Pause) to enter a pause as needed.  
The letter <p> is displayed to indicate that a pause is added.  
The default pause length is two seconds*. To change it, see  
To add more pauses into the dialing sequence, press [  
]
(Pause) again.  
*
The default pause length varies depending on the country  
where you are using the machine.  
Fax Number  
012P  
<Apply>  
6
Enter the country code, the area code, and the  
fax/telephone number using the numeric keys.  
Fax Number  
012p031XXXXXXX  
<Apply>  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a  
Time (Sequential Broadcast)  
NOTE  
The number of destinations that you can specify for a  
sequential broadcast  
You can send the same fax to multiple destinations  
simultaneously.  
Using the numeric keys: Up to 10 destinations  
One-touch keys: Up to 19 destinations  
Coded dial codes: Up to 181 destinations  
Keys to be used for this operation  
To specify destinations using the numeric keys  
Numeric keys  
Enter the numbers and press [OK].  
For confirming/deleting/editing the specified  
destinations  
(1) Select <Confirm/Edit Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Send: Press Start  
Destinations: 3  
0123456789  
OK  
Start  
Specify Next Destin...  
Confirm/Edit Destina  
1
2
Place your document.  
(2) Select the destination using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Details of the destination are displayed.  
Confirm/Edit Dest.  
Canon 0987654321  
User01 9876543210  
0123456789  
Specify destination.  
To specify destination, following methods are available.  
Specifying destinations by entering the fax number  
Specifying destinations using one-touch keys  
Specifying destinations using coded dial codes  
Specifying destinations using group addresses  
Specifying destinations using the address book  
(3) In order to delete the destination, select <Delete Destination>  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
For editing destinations being entered using numeric  
keys  
Edit the destinations using numeric keys and select <Apply>  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
3
Select how to specify destinations that you want  
to add using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Address Book  
Coded Dial  
Specify Next Destination (New)  
4
5
Repeat Step 2 and 3 to enter all the destinations.  
Press [ ] (Start).  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RX Mode  
This section describes how to receive faxes.  
RX Mode  
The machine allows you to receive faxes automatically or manually in several different ways.  
See the following flowcharts to select the receive mode that you want to use.  
The default setting is <Auto>.  
Auto mode  
You can receive faxes automatically.  
The receive mode varies depending on whether an external telephone is connected to the machine or not.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
Without an external telephone connected  
With an external telephone connected  
When the call is a fax  
The machine receives  
the fax automatically.  
When the call is a voice call  
The machine does not respond.  
An incoming call rings for the specified number of times. *  
When you pick up the handset while the  
When you do not pick up the handset while  
incoming call rings  
the incoming call rings  
When the call is a fax  
You can hear a  
beep.Following the  
procedure below, receive the  
fax.  
When the call is a  
voice call  
When the call is a fax  
The machine receives the  
fax automatically.  
When the call is a  
voice call  
You cannot start talking.  
You can start talking  
as is.  
(1) Press [Fax].  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(3) Hang up the handset.  
* You can set the incoming call ring time using“Incoming Ring(P. 6-25).  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax/Tel mode  
You can receive faxes automatically (The telephone rings on an incoming call). To disable audible incoming rings, see  
You can answer incoming calls by picking up the handset.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
An incoming call rings for the specified number of times.*1  
When you pick up the handset within  
the specified number of times  
When you do not pick up the handset  
within the specified number of times  
When the call is a fax  
You can hear a  
When the call  
is a voice call  
beep.Following the  
procedure below, receive the  
fax.  
You can start  
talking as is.  
(1) Press [Fax].  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(3) Hang up the handset.  
The machine judges whether the  
incoming call is a fax or voice call.*2  
When the call is  
When the call is  
a fax  
The machine receives  
the fax automatically.  
a voice call  
The telephone rings.*3  
When you pick up the  
handset during ringing  
You can start talking as is.  
When you do not pick up  
the handset during ringing  
The machine hangs up the  
telephone or switches to the fax  
receive mode.*4  
*1 You can change the incoming call ring time using“Incoming Ring(P. 6-25)  
*2 To set a ring delay before the telephone starts ringing on an incoming call, go to the <Ring Start Time> option.  
*3 To adjust the incoming call ring time, go to the <Incoming Ring Time> option.  
*4 To specify how the machine behaves when you do not answer an incoming call, go to the <Action After Ring> option.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Answer mode  
You can receive faxes automatically.  
The telephone’s built-in answer function records messages of unanswered calls.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
The telephone rings the number of times specified for the built-in  
answering machine.*1  
When you pick up the handset during  
ringing  
When the built-in answering machine  
starts up  
When the call is a fax  
You can hear a  
beep.Following the  
procedure below, receive the  
fax.  
When the call is a  
voice call  
You can start talking as  
is.  
When the call is a fax  
The machine receives the  
fax automatically.  
When the call is a  
voice call  
The built-in answering  
machine records the  
message.*2  
(1) Press [Fax].  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(3) Hang up the handset.  
*1 Set the answer function to answer after a few rings.  
*2 The message is recorded on the answer function (You are advised to add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning  
of the message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds).  
Manual mode  
Pick up the handset to answer calls or receive faxes when the machine is set to manual mode.  
Set this mode when you expect to receive more incoming telephone calls than faxes or when you receive few faxes.  
Operation for when an incoming call is received  
The external phone rings.  
When you pick up the handset while the  
telephone rings  
When you do not pick up the handset while  
the telephone rings  
The machine cannot receive a call or fax.*1  
When the call is a fax  
When the call is a voice call  
You can hear a  
You can start talking as is.  
beep.Following the  
procedure below, receive the  
fax.*2  
(1) Press [Fax].  
(2) Select <Start Receiving>  
using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
(3) Hang up the handset.  
*1 When“Auto RX Switch(P. 6-25) is set to <On> , the machine automatically starts receiving a fax after several rings.  
*2 When“Remote RX(P. 6-25) is set, you can dial the telephone to receive faxes remotely.  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) mode  
This mode assigns distinctive ring patterns to up to two phone numbers per telephone line. The machine automatically  
identifies incoming calls based on the ring pattern and sorts out whether an incoming call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring  
pattern that matches the ring pattern of your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for more information.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
3
4
Select <RX Mode> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Changing the Receive Mode  
Select the receive mode that you want to use.  
NOTE  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
About the external telephone  
The machine may not be able to send or receive faxes properly,  
depending on the type of telephone connected to it.  
RX Mode: Auto  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
Select <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Keys to be used for this operation  
FAX  
RX Mode  
Auto  
Fax/Tel Auto Switch  
Manual  
Answering Machine  
OK  
Select the option using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
1
2
Press [  
].  
Fax/Tel Auto Switch  
<Apply>  
Ring Start Time: 6  
Incoming Ring Time: ...  
After Ring: RX  
Select <RX Mode> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Specify destination.  
01/01/2011 12:52AM  
Set the duration during which the  
machine tries to detect fax tones before  
the telephone starts ringing.  
RX Mode: Auto  
<Ring Start Time>  
Set the duration somewhere between 5 to  
30 seconds and press [OK].  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
Set the duration during which the  
telephone keeps ringing when an  
<Incoming Ring Time> incoming call comes.  
3
Select the receive mode using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Set the duration somewhere between 15  
to 300 seconds and press [OK].  
RX Mode  
Specify how the machine behaves when  
an incoming call is not answered.  
Select <End> or <RX> and press [OK].  
- <End>: Disconnect the call.  
Auto  
Fax/Tel Auto Switch  
Manual  
Answering Machine  
Action After Ring  
- <RX>: Receive an incoming fax.  
When <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> is selected  
Proceed to specify the advanced settings. See“Advanced Settings  
5
Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
The changes are saved.  
If you select <DRPD: Select Fax>  
Select a ring pattern using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Fax/Tel Auto Switch  
<Apply>  
Ring Start Time: 6  
Incoming Ring Time: ...  
After Ring: RX  
Advanced Settings for the Fax/Tel Auto  
Switch Mode  
Set the advanced settings for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
FAX  
OK  
1
Press [  
].  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Forwarding Fax Documents  
3
4
Select <Forwarding Settings> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Received fax documents are transferred to a fax, E-mail or a file  
server.  
NOTE  
System Settings  
For forwarding to E-mail or a file server (D1370 Only)  
When a fax document is transferred to an E-mail or a file server, the  
document is converted to a PDF file.  
Security Settings  
Communication Manag...  
Select Country/Regi...  
Forwarding Settings  
When the destination is deleted from an address book  
When you delete the destination from the address book between  
the time the fax forward is configured and the time the fax is  
received, a destination unknown forwarding error occurs.  
Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
To learn how to handle transfer errors  
See the following sections.  
Forwarding Settings  
Off  
On  
Setting Document Transfer (Automatic  
Forwarding)  
Starts to transfer received documents. Next, you need to  
configure transfer destinations.  
<On>  
<Off>  
Specify whether a document is automatically transferred  
during receiving and where to be transferred.  
Transfer is not performed.  
When <On> is selected  
You can specify where to forward. You can specify only by the  
following approaches:  
NOTE  
Destinations that can be specified  
You can specify the followings as destinations.  
• Fax  
• E-mail (D1370 only)  
• File server (D1370 only)  
• Group destination”  
CANON01 01234567  
CANON02 9876543...  
CANON03 0011223...  
Keys to be used for this operation  
All A-Z 0-9  
Menu  
5
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory  
to Other Destinations (Manual Forwarding)  
OK  
When a fax is stored in memory, you can manually forward it to  
a specified destination.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
NOTE  
Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Destinations that can be specified  
You can specify the followings as destinations.  
• Fax  
• E-mail (D1370 only)  
Menu  
• File server (D1370 only)  
• Group destination  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintena...  
System Settings  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Keys to be used for this operation  
Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
When received documents are transferred or when a transfer error  
occurs, its details can be saved in a memory or printed.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
OK  
1
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
OK  
2
Select <RX Job> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
RX Job  
Menu  
3
Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintena...  
System Settings  
RX Job Status/History  
Job Status  
Job History  
3
Select <Store/Print when Fowarding> using [  
or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
System Settings  
4
Select the job that you want to forward using [  
or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
Communication Manag...  
Select Country/Regi...  
Forwarding Settings  
Store/Print When Fow  
You cannot forward received faxes when  
the machine is in the middle of receiving another fax  
the machine starts printing a job after it has received a fax  
To print a transferred document  
RX Job Status  
(1) Select <Print Images> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
12:52AM Receiving  
12:54AM Waiting:Print  
Store/Print Forwarding  
Print Images  
Store Images in Memo...  
5
6
Select <Forward> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
(2) Select settings using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Print Images  
Off  
On  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Waiting to ...  
Only When Error Occu...  
When a document is transferred, that  
document is not printed.  
Specify the forwarding destination.  
<Off>  
<On>  
See the following sections to specify destinations.  
When a document is transferred, that  
document is printed.  
<Only when Error  
Occurs>  
Only when a transfer error occurs, that  
document is printed.  
CANON 0123456789  
GroupA 2 Destin...  
User01 01234567...  
All A-Z  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Select a job using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To save a transferred document in a memory  
(1) Select <Store Images in Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Fax Forwarding Errors  
12:52AM  
Store/Print Forwarding  
Print Images  
12:54AM  
Store Images in Memor  
Detailed information of the forwarding error job is displayed.  
(2) Select settings using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Store Images in Memory  
Do Not Store  
Only When Error Occu...  
To delete/print a job  
(1) Select <Delete> or <Print> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
When a document is transferred, that  
document is not saved.  
<Do Not Store>  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
<Only when Error  
Occurs>  
Only when a transfer error occurs, that  
document is saved in a memory.  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
4
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
<Delete>  
<Print>  
Press to delete jobs.  
Print the job contents.  
Re-fowarding/Printing/Deleting  
Documents in Which Transfer Is Failed  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Delete?  
NOTE  
When You Use This Feature  
Specify <Only when Error Occurs> to the <Store Images in  
Memory> of the <Store/Print When Fowarding>.  
Yes  
No  
For job forwarding  
About re-forwarded job  
(1) You can specify where to forward. You can specify only by the  
following approaches:  
The job which has been reforwarded successfully is deleted.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
CANON01 01234567  
CANON02 9876543...  
CANON03 0011223...  
All A-Z  
OK  
1
2
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
Select <Fax Forwarding Errors> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
RX Job  
Fax Forwarding Error  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Managing Faxes Stored in Memory  
To cancel the job  
Manage faxes stored in memory.  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs  
Check the details of the fax currently being sent or waiting to  
be sent. Cancel faxes that you decide not to send.  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Sending  
Time: 01/01 12:52AM  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Cancel?  
Yes  
No  
OK  
The sending job is canceled. Fax transmission to all the  
destinations will be canceled for sequential broadcast.  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
To only check the details of the selected job  
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the  
details of the selected job to close the screen.  
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <TX Job> and press  
[OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
Combining and Printing the Received  
Documents You Saved  
Instead of printing at“Memory Lock Settings(P. 6-27) during  
receiving, documents saved in a memory are combined and  
printed altogether.  
RX Job  
3
4
Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
NOTE  
Printing documents saved in a memory during receiving  
You cannot individually choose and print a document. You cannot  
preview the document content, either.  
TX Job Status/History  
Job Status  
When <Memory Lock Time > is set  
Job History  
At <Memory Lock End Time>, you can combine and print received  
documents saved in a memory from the <Memory Lock Start  
Time> to the <Memory Lock End Time>.  
Press [ ] or [ ] to select the job that you want to  
check or cancel and press [OK].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
TX Job Status  
12:52AM Sending  
12:54AM Scanning  
The details of the selected job is displayed.  
OK  
Details  
<Cancel>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status: Sending  
Time: 01/01 12:52AM  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Checking and Deleting Received Faxes  
Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Check the details of faxes stored in memory. Delete faxes that  
you no longer need.  
NOTE  
Menu  
About faxes stored in memory  
You can specify forwarding destinations.  
You can combine and print documents saved in the memory  
Instead of printing during receiving.  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintena...  
System Settings  
3
4
Select <Communication Management Settings>  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
System Settings  
Device Information ...  
Dept. ID Management...  
Security Settings  
Communication Manage  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Select <Memory Lock Settings> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
OK  
When <Memory Lock PIN> is set, enter the number using the  
numeric keys and press [OK].  
1
2
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
Communication Mgt. Set  
Fax Settings  
Select <RX Job> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Memory Lock Settings  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
5
6
Select <Off> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
RX Job  
Memory Lock Settings  
Off  
On  
3
4
Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
RX Job Status/History  
Job Status  
Job History  
Fax documents saved in the memory are combined and printed.  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Select the job that you want to check or delete  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
RX Job Status  
12:52AM Receiving  
12:54AM Waiting:Print  
The details of the job is displayed.  
Details  
<Delete>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status:Waiting to...  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To delete the job  
(1) Select <Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
4
Select the job that you want to check using [ ] or  
] and press [OK].  
[
Details  
The details of the job is displayed.  
<Delete>  
<Forward>  
Job Number: 0004  
Status:Waiting to...  
TX Job History  
05:10AM NG ♯995  
05:06AM NG ♯099  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Delete?  
5
6
Select the item that you want to check using [  
or [ ] and press [OK].  
]
Yes  
No  
Details  
Job Number: 0004  
Result: NG ♯995  
Started: 01/01 12:5...  
Duration: 00'00  
The job is deleted.  
(3) Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.  
To only check the details of the selected job  
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the  
details of the selected job to close the screen.  
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the  
screen.  
Checking the History of Received/Sent  
Faxes  
Check the history of received or sent faxes.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
OK  
1
2
Press [  
] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
Select <TX Job> or <RX Job> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
RX Job  
<TX Job>  
<RX Job>  
Confirm the sending job history.  
Confirm the received job history.  
3
Select <Job History> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
TX Job Status/History  
Job Status  
Job History  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the Default Fax Settings  
5
Select the item using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
The default settings are a set of standard settings  
predetermined by the machine. These settings become  
effective when the machine is turned ON and OFF, or when  
Resolution/Density/Sharpness  
[
] (Reset) is pressed to revert to the default settings.  
You can change the following default settings based on your  
needs.  
• Resolution  
• Density  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
Resolution: 200 x 10  
+
Density: 0  
• 2-Sided Original  
• Sharpness  
-
2-Sided Original: O...  
6
7
Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] after you have  
specified the setting and press [OK].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
Change Defaults  
<Apply>  
Resolution: 200 x 1...  
+
Density: 0  
-
2-Sided Original: O...  
OK  
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Menu  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
3
4
Select <TX Function Settings> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Fax Settings  
Basic Settings  
TX Function Settings  
RX Function Settings  
RX Print Settings  
Select <Change Defaults> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
TX Function Settings  
Change Defaults  
Register Unit Name ...  
ECM TX  
Pause Time  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing Fax Settings (Settings that Can Be Specified Using the [Menu] Button)  
5
Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Configure the following settings to determine how to send  
faxes.  
For details on the procedure for setting specifications or the  
setting items, see the next items.  
ECM TX  
Off  
On  
*
Select <Apply> when <Apply> appears on the screen after you  
have specified the setting and press [OK].  
6
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
The steps to take for configuring the  
send settings  
The procedure is complete.  
Options  
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the send  
settings.  
Configure the following options to send a fax.  
The procedure describes the steps to change theECM TX”  
setting.  
Fax Settings  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Basic  
Settings  
Menu  
TX Function  
Settings  
OK  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Menu  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
3
4
Select <TX Function Settings> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
Fax Settings  
Basic Settings  
TX Function Settings  
RX Function Settings  
RX Print Settings  
Select <ECM TX> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
TX Function Settings  
Change Defaults  
Register Unit Name ...  
ECM TX  
Pause Time  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Register Unit Telephone Number  
Register your machine’s fax number.  
How to access the option  
NOTE  
Where the senders name appears on the page  
The information is printed at the top of each page that you are  
sending.  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> →  
<Register Unit Telephone Number>  
How to register the fax number  
Enter up to 20 digits using the numeric keys.  
You can also enter the [+].  
Fax/Telephone Number  
(FAX No.)  
Sender Name  
Page Number  
Sending Date/Time  
(Unit Name)  
01/01/201102:07PMFAX  
123XXXXXXX  
CANON  
P.0001  
Select Line Type  
Change this option when you cannot send a fax.  
Contact your local telephone company when you are not  
sure of the line type that you are using.  
Telephone Number  
Mark  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> →  
<Select Line Type>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
ECM TX  
The ECM (Error Correction Mode) detects and corrects  
errors that occur during fax transmissions. It helps in  
minimizing sending errors caused by a poor connection.  
Pulse  
Select this setting when you are using a pulse line.  
Select this setting when you are using a tone line.  
Tone  
NOTE  
Check if the ECM is enabled on the receiving fax  
machine  
The ECM is effective only when it is enabled on both machines.  
Off-Hook Alarm  
Specify whether to sound an alarm when the telephone  
handset is left unhooked and adjust the volume.  
An error occurs when the ECM is enabled  
The error may be caused by poor telephone line conditions.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings><Basic Settings> →  
When telephone line conditions are poor  
It may take additional time to send your fax if a problem occurs  
when sending over the telephone line.  
<Off-Hook Alarm>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Off  
No alarm sounds.  
How to access the option  
Off-Hook Alarm Volume:  
1 to 3  
The alarm sounds at the  
specified volume.  
On  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Settings> <ECM TX>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Change Defaults  
Change the default settings, which become effective  
when the machine is turned ON and OFF or [  
pressed.  
Off  
Disable the ECM.  
Enable the ECM.  
] (Reset) is  
On  
How to access the option  
Pause Time  
[
] (Menu)<Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Settings> <Change Defaults>  
Press [  
] (Pause) to specify the pause length.  
Settings  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Register Unit Name (Fax)  
Settings> <Pause Time>  
Setting  
Register your name or company’s name (sender’s name).  
Once the information has been registered, it is printed at  
the top of each page that you are sending.  
(Bold: Default setting)  
1 to 2 to 15  
(seconds)  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Settings> <Register Unit Name (Fax)>  
How to register the senders name  
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters.  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
The steps to take for configuring the  
receiving settings  
Auto Redial  
Enable auto redial for automatically redialing the fax  
number when the line is busy or a sending error occurs.  
Specify the number of redial attempts and the interval  
between these attempts.  
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the fax  
receiving settings.  
The procedure describes the steps to change theECM RX”  
setting.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Settings> <Auto Redial>  
Settings  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Disable Auto Redial  
number manually.  
Off  
Redial Times:  
1 to 2 to 10 (times)  
Set the number of redial  
attempts.  
OK  
Redial Interval:  
On 2 to 99 (minutes)  
Set the interval (in minutes)  
between redial attempts.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Specify whether to redial the  
number when a sending error  
occurs.  
Redial When Err Occurs:  
Off, On  
Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Sender ID  
Specify whether to add the sender ID to the fax that you are  
sending.  
The sender ID is printed at the top of each page that you are  
sending, along with the fax number and sender’s name. This  
helps the recipient to identify the sender.  
Menu  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Settings> <Sender ID>  
Settings  
3
Select <RX Function Settings> using [ ] or [  
and press [OK].  
]
(Bold: Default setting)  
Off  
No sender ID is added.  
Fax Settings  
Basic Settings  
Select the location where the  
sender ID is printed on the  
page.  
Print Location:  
On Image, Above Image  
TX Function Settings  
RX Function Settings  
RX Print Settings  
On  
Select the symbol to be added  
in front of the telephone  
number.  
Mark No. as: TEL/FAX:  
FAX, TEL  
4
5
Select <ECM RX> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending  
Specify whether to check for a dial tone before dialing.  
How to access the option  
RX Function Settings  
ECM RX  
Incoming Ring  
Remote RX  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <TX Function  
Settings> <Check Dial Tone Before Sending>  
Auto RX Switch  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Off  
Do not check for a dial tone.  
Check for a dial tone before dialing.  
On  
ECM RX  
Off  
On  
*
Select <Apply> when <Apply> appears on the screen after you  
have specified the setting and press [OK].  
6
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
The procedure is complete.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Remote RX  
Options  
Specify whether to receive faxes remotely by dialing the ID  
number using the push-buttons of the external telephone  
connected to the machine when an incoming call comes.  
If you use the pulse line, press*(tone) and then dial the  
Remote RX ID.  
Configure the following options to receive a fax.  
Fax Settings  
RX  
Function  
Settings  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Function  
Settings> <Remote RX>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
RX Print  
Settings  
Off  
Disable remote retrieval.  
Remote RX  
On ID: 00 to 25  
Enable remote retrieval.  
You can specify the ID number in <Remote  
RX ID>.  
ECM RX  
to 99  
The ECM (Error Correction Mode) detects and corrects  
errors that occur during fax transmissions. It helps in  
minimizing sending errors caused by a poor connection.  
Auto RX Switch  
Set the incoming call ring time before the machine switches  
to the fax mode automatically. This option can be enabled  
when the <RX Mode> is set to <Manual>.  
NOTE  
Check if the ECM is enabled on the receiving fax  
machine  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Function  
The ECM is effective only when it is enabled on both machines.  
Settings> <Auto RX Switch>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
An error occurs even when the ECM is enabled  
The error may be caused by poor telephone line conditions.  
When telephone line conditions are poor  
It may take additional time to receive your fax if a problem occurs  
when sending over the telephone line.  
The machine does not switch to the fax  
mode automatically.  
Off  
Incoming  
The machine switches to the fax mode  
automatically after the specified length  
of time.  
Ring Time: 1  
to 15 to 99  
(seconds)  
On  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings><RX Function  
Settings> <ECM RX>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
2-Sided Printing  
Enable this option to print on both sides of paper. This saves  
excessive paper consumption.  
Off  
Disable the ECM.  
Enable the ECM.  
On  
IMPORTANT  
Notes on 2-Sided printing  
Incoming Ring  
Accurately attach the paper size switch lever. If the paper size  
switch lever is not securely attached, documents may not  
be fed properly or jammed.  
Specify whether or not the external telephone or the  
handset rings on an incoming call when <RX Mode> is set  
to <Auto> or <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>.  
You can set the incoming call ring time.  
The machine automatically starts receiving a fax after the  
external telephone keeps ringing for a specified length of  
time.  
The machine’s speaker rings on an incoming fax only when  
<RX Mode> is set to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings>  
<2-Sided Printing>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Function  
Settings> <Incoming Ring>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Off  
Print on only one side of paper.  
Print on both sides of paper.  
On  
The telephone does not ring on an  
incoming call.  
Off  
Ring Times:  
On 1 to 2 to 99  
The telephone rings on an incoming call.  
You can set the incoming call ring time in  
rings in <Ring Times>.  
(times)  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
The steps to take for configuring the  
system settings  
Reduce RX Size  
Enable this option to scale the image to fit on the selected  
paper size or reduce the image by a specific percentage  
when you receive a fax.  
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the  
system settings.  
The procedure describes the steps to change the“TX Start  
Speed”setting.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings>  
<Reduce RX Size>  
Settings  
Keys to be used for this operation  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Menu  
Off  
No image reduction.  
<Auto>: Reduce the image  
automatically to fit onto the selected  
paper size.  
<97%>, <95%>, <90%>, <75%>:  
Reduce the image by the  
predetermined ratio.  
Reduction Ratio:  
Auto, 97%, 95%,  
90%, 75%  
On  
OK  
<Vertical/Horizontal>: Reduce the  
Reduction Method: image in vertical and horizontal  
Vertical/Horizontal, directions.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Vertical Only  
<Vertical Only>: Reduce the image  
in the vertical direction only.  
Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
RX Page Footer  
Specify whether to print the reception date, time, job ID,  
and page number at the bottom of the page when printing  
received faxes.  
Menu  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintena...  
System Settings  
How to access the option  
[
](Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings>  
<RX Page Footer>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
3
4
5
6
Select <Communication Management Settings>  
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Off  
Do not print the page footer.  
Print the page footer.  
System Settings  
On  
Device Information ...  
Dept. ID Management...  
Security Settings  
Communication Manage  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
Specify whether to continue printing received faxes when  
the toner is nearly empty.  
Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
IMPORTANT  
If <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low> is set to <On>  
Note that the output may not be clear, as subtle details such as thin  
lines and light colors may not be clearly reproduced, due to a small  
amount of toner remaining inside the toner cartridge. Plus, faxes  
are deleted once they have been printed.  
Communication Mgt. Set  
Fax Settings  
Memory Lock Settings  
How to access the option  
Select <TX Start Speed> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
[
] (Menu) <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings>  
<Continue Printing When Toner Is Low>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Fax Settings  
TX Start Speed  
RX Start Speed  
The machine does not continue printing received  
faxes.  
Off  
On  
The machine continues printing received faxes.  
Select the send start speed using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
TX Start Speed  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
7200 bps  
*
Select <Apply> when <Apply> appears on the screen after you  
have specified the setting and press [OK].  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Settings  
7
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
(Boldface: Default setting)  
The procedure is complete.  
Off  
Disable Memory Lock.  
Memory  
Lock PIN:  
Seven-digit  
number  
Options  
Once the PIN is set, you are prompted to  
enter it every time you change or  
disable the Memory Lock mode settings.  
Configure the following options to receive a fax.  
Specify whether to print the RX result  
Print Report: report when receiving a fax.  
System Settings  
Communication  
Management  
Settings  
On Off, On  
ActivateReceive Results (D1370/D1350  
Only)to enable this setting.  
Fax Settings  
When <On> is set, received faxes are  
stored in memory only for a specified  
length of time.  
Set <Memory Lock Start Time> and  
<Memory Lock End Time> respectively.  
Memory  
Lock Time :  
Off, On  
Restrict TX  
Function  
NOTE  
Memory Lock PIN  
Press [OK] without entering any numbers when you do not want  
to set the PIN.  
You cannot set a PIN consisting only of <0> (<0000000>).  
When you set a PIN starting with <0>, the PIN is set in the  
following manner.  
Example: When you enter <02> or <002>, the PIN is set as  
<0000002>.  
TX Start Speed  
Change the transmission start speed if you are experiencing  
a transmission problem.  
Memory Lock Settings operations  
How to access the option  
When memory lock settings are changed from <On> to <Off>,  
the documents saved in the memory up to then are combined  
and printed.  
At <Memory Lock End Time>, you can combine and print  
received documents saved in the memory from the <Memory  
Lock Start Time> to the <Memory Lock End Time>.  
[
](Menu) <System Settings> <Communication  
Management Settings> <Fax Settings> <TX Start  
Speed>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,  
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps  
RX Start Speed  
Change the reception start speed if you are experiencing a  
problem.  
Select Country/Region  
Specify the country or region where the machine is used.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Communication  
IMPORTANT  
After you have configured the option  
Management Settings> <Fax Settings> <RX Start  
Speed>  
Restart the machine to take effect the changes.  
Setting  
(Bold: Default setting)  
33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,  
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Select Country/  
Region>  
Memory Lock Settings  
Setting  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Normally, received documents are immediately printed. However,  
you can specify whether or not to store received faxes in memory  
before printing. You can then print the stored faxes at any time or  
delete them without printing to save paper.  
United States (US), Canada (CA),  
Brazil (BR), Mexico (MX), Other  
How to access the option  
Address Book PIN  
Set a PIN to protect the address book. You are prompted to  
enter the correct PIN to register, edit, or delete destinations.  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Communication  
Management Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> (*)  
* If <Memory Lock PIN> is specified, use the numeric keys  
[
] to [ ] to enter those numbers, and then press [OK].  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Restrict TX  
Function> <Address Book PIN>  
How to set a PIN  
Enter up to a 7-digit number.  
To cancel the entered PIN, clear the numbers and press  
[OK].  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Restrict New Destinations  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry  
Enable this option to restrict registering new destinations  
in one-touch keys or coded dial codes. When this option is  
enabled, you are restricted to do the following.  
• Specifying a destination using the numeric keys  
• Registering new destinations in the address book, one-  
touch keys, or coded dial codes  
Specify whether to require confirmation before sending a  
fax. When this option is enabled, you are prompted to enter  
the fax number again before sending a fax.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Restrict TX  
Function> <Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
• Editing the destinations registered in the address book,  
one-touch keys, or coded dial codes  
IMPORTANT  
Off  
Confirmation is not required.  
Restriction exceptions  
Entering new destinations from external telephone is not restricted.  
You are prompted to enter the fax number for  
confirmation.  
On  
When settings are not immediately applied  
During fax sending operation including new destinations or  
manual redialing operation, restriction settings may not be applied  
immediately.  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
Specify whether to restrict sending faxes to multiple  
destinations simultaneously.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Restrict TX  
Function> <Restrict Sequential Broadcast>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
NOTE  
Redial restrictions  
When <Restrict New Dest.> is set to <On>, the saved fax sending  
history up to then is deleted for preventing those new destinations  
in the history from being redialed.  
Allow sending faxes to multiple destinations  
simultaneously.  
Off  
Confirm  
Sequential  
Broadcast  
The confirmation screen is displayed when  
you are sending faxes to multiple destinations  
simultaneously.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Restrict TX  
Reject  
Sequential  
Broadcast  
Disallow sending faxes to multiple  
destinations simultaneously.  
Function> <Restrict New Destinations>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Off  
No restrictions.  
You are restricted to register new destinations or  
edit the destinations registered in one-touch keys or  
coded dial codes.  
On  
Allow Fax Driver TX  
Specify whether to allow sending faxes from the fax driver  
installed on your computer.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Restrict TX  
Function> <Allow Fax Driver TX>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Disallow sending faxes from the fax driver installed  
on your computer.  
Off  
Allow sending faxes from the fax driver installed on  
your computer.  
On  
Restrict History TX  
Specify whether to restrict sending faxes from the history.  
IMPORTANT  
When settings are not immediately applied  
During manual redialing operations, for example, restriction  
settings may not be immediately applied.  
How to access the option  
[
] (Menu) <System Settings> <Restrict TX  
Function> <Restrict History TX>  
Settings  
(Bold: Default setting)  
Off  
Allow sending faxes from the history.  
Disallow sending faxes from the history.  
On  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
7
Using the Scan Functions  
The documents scanned by the machine can be stored in a computer or a USB memory  
device. You can also send scanned documents to your e-mail application or a file server.  
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the Mac Scanner Driver Guide.  
To view how to display the Mac Scanner Driver Guide, see“For Macintosh Users(P. 11-4).  
Basic Scan Operations  
7-2  
Scanning Using Keys on the Operation Panel  
7-2  
7-4  
7-5  
7-6  
Saving Scanned Documents to USB Memory Device  
E-mailing Scanned Documents (D1370 Only)  
Sending Scanned Documents to a File Server (D1370 Only)  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Scan Operations  
4
Specify a destination using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Scanning Using Keys on the Operation  
Panel  
You can scan a document using the keys on the operation  
panel.  
Specify destination.  
EXAMPLE1  
EXAMPLE2  
Note  
To scan documents by operating  
SeeScanin the e-Manual.  
When multiple computers are connected the computer  
connected by a USB cable is listed at the top.  
When a computer is connected by a USB cable this screen is not  
displayed.  
If more than ten computers are connected via a network the  
eleventh and subsequent computers are not displayed (you  
cannot scan). Reduce the number of computers connected to  
this machine via a network.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
SCAN  
e-ManualScanningScanning Paper Documents  
and Saving Them to a Computer (USB & Network  
Connection)Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan  
Utility  
OK  
*
You can change the names for the displayed computers.  
e-ManualScanningScanning Paper Documents  
and Saving Them to a Computer (USB & Network  
Connection)Using the MF Toolbox  
1
Place your document.  
5
Specify the scan settings using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
2
3
Press [  
].  
Select <Computer> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Select Scan Type  
Scan: Press OK  
Color Scan  
Select the scan type.  
B&W Scan  
Custom 1  
Computer  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
Scanning operation starts.  
The scanner settings are specified by default as follows.  
Scan  
Mode  
File  
PDF  
Resolution  
300 dpi  
Type Settings  
Searchable/  
PDF  
Color Scan Color  
Compact  
Black and  
White  
B&W Scan  
Custom 1  
Custom 2  
300 dpi  
TIFF  
-
-
JPEG/  
Exif  
Color  
Color  
300 dpi  
Searchable/  
Standard  
300 dpi  
PDF  
Scanning from the feeder  
After saving the document, the display returns to the basic  
scanning screen.  
Scanning from the platen glass  
Proceed to Step 6  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
If you cannot scan  
You cannot scan when MF Toolbox setting screen is displayed.  
Click [ ] to close the screen before starting a scan.  
The location of saved scanned images  
After scanning, the folder where the images have been saved to  
opens automatically.  
By default, folders named with the date when the data was created  
are put in the [My Pictures] folder in [My Documents]. (On Windows  
Vista/7, the folder is created in the [Pictures] folder.)  
To change the scanner settings  
From your computer you can change the settings for the save  
location, file format, and image resolution.  
e-ManualScanningScanning Paper Documents and Saving  
Them to a Computer (USB & Network Connection)Using the  
MF Toolbox  
6
7
To continuously scan the document, select <Scan  
Next Original> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Select Next Action  
<Scan Next Original>  
<Store and Finish>  
<Cancel>  
Confirm Destination  
To Cancel the scan  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(2) Select <Yes> with using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To confirm the destination  
Select <Confirm Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Select <Store and Finish> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Select Next Action  
<Scan Next Original>  
<Store and Finish>  
<Cancel>  
Confirm Destination  
After saving the document, the display returns to the basic  
scanning screen.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
6
Specify the scan settings based on your purpose  
of the scan.  
Saving Scanned Documents to USB  
Memory Device  
The following settings can be changed.  
For details on the setting procedure, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
You can save scanned documents to USB memory device  
inserted in the USB port.  
This section describes the basic procedure.  
Scan size  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Density  
Original orientation  
Original Type  
2-Sided Original  
Sharpness  
IMPORTANT  
The USB memory device port on the machine  
The port supports USB 1.1.  
Do not insert anything other than USB memory device.  
Supported file systems and memory capacity  
Supported file systems and memory capacity include the following.  
You can have your USB memory device formatted with one of the  
following file systems on your computer.  
Data Size  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task. To  
apply these settings to all tasks, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
FAT16: up to 2 GB  
FAT32: up to 32GB  
Press [  
] (Start).  
For details, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Store and Finish>  
<Cancel>  
Keys to be used for this operation  
SCAN  
Scanning starts.  
When scanning from the feeder, or set the  
<File Format> to <JPEG>  
After scanning the document, the scanned data is sent to  
the USB memory.  
When scanning from the platen glass, or set the  
<File Format> to other than <JPEG>  
Proceed to Step 7  
OK  
Start  
1
2
Insert a USB memory device to the USB port.  
The machine will begin to read the device when USB memory is  
inserted. Do not touch or remove the device from the port.  
7
To continuously scan the document, press [  
(Start).  
]
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Store and Finish>  
<Cancel>  
To Cancel the scan  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Place your document.  
8
Select <Store and Finish> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
3
4
Press [  
].  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Store and Finish>  
<Cancel>  
Select <Memory Media> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Select the scan type.  
The scanned data is sent to the USB memory.  
Computer  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Folder and file names that can be saved  
TheSCAN_00folder is created in the  
E-mailing Scanned Documents (D1370 Only)  
Attach scanned documents to e-mails and send them to a  
specified destination.  
This section describes the basic procedure.  
top level directory (root folder) in the USB  
memory device. Scanned document files are  
saved in this folder.  
Folder name When theSCAN_00folder reaches limit, the  
“SCAN_01folder is automatically created.  
Folders up toSCAN_99are automatically  
created when the current working folder  
becomes full.  
Note  
Preparing to Use the E-mail Functions  
You can send scanned documents to your e-mail application. You  
can convert scanned documents into PDF files and send them to  
the destination (e-mail application) as e-mail attachments.  
Please readNetwork Settingsin the e-Manual and configure your  
e-mail settings before using the e-mail function.  
File names betweenSCAN0001.XXXand  
“SCAN9999.XXXare provided. (“XXXis the  
extension for the file format.)  
File name  
The two-digit folder number is provided in  
the fifth and sixth characters from the left.  
A maximum of 100 files can be saved in a  
folder.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
SCAN  
NOTE  
When removing the USB memory device form the port  
(1) Press[ ] (Reset).  
(2) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).  
(3) Select <Device Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
OK  
Start  
Status Monitor/Cancel  
Device Status  
Copy/Print Job  
TX Job  
1
Place your document.  
RX Job  
(4) Select <Remove Memory Media> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
2
3
Press [  
].  
Select <E-Mail> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
Device Status  
Paper Information  
Remove Memory Media  
Check Counter  
Select the scan type.  
Remote Scanner  
Memory Media  
E-Mail  
Secure Print Memory ...  
(5) Remove the USB memory device.  
(6) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the  
details of the selected job to close the screen.  
4
5
Specify the destination.  
Specify destinations in the following ways.  
For details on the setting procedure, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
input directly  
by selecting a one-touch key  
by selecting a coded dial code  
from the Address book  
under sequential broadcasting  
Specify the scan settings based on your purpose  
of the scan.  
The following settings can be changed.  
For details on the setting procedure, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
Scan size  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Density  
Original orientation  
Original Type  
2-Sided Original  
Sharpness  
Data Size  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task. To  
make the settings effective for all e-mail send  
operations, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Specify the e-mail settings as needed.  
Sending Scanned Documents to a File  
Server (D1370 Only)  
The following settings can be changed.  
For details on the setting procedure, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
Subject/Body  
Reply-to  
Priority  
Sending scanned documents to a file server.  
This section describes the basic procedure.  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task.  
To make the settings effective for all e-mail send operations, see  
“Scanningin the e-Manual.  
Note  
Preparation for Scanning (File Server)  
You can send scanned documents to a file server. You can convert  
scanned documents into TIFF files and send them a file server.  
Before sending to a file server, seeNetwork Settingsin the  
e-Manual and configure the send settings.  
7
8
Press [  
] (Start).  
Scanning starts.  
To continuously scan the document, press [  
(Start).  
]
Keys to be used for this operation  
SCAN  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Sending>  
<Cancel>  
Destinations: 1  
No. of TX Pages: 1  
To Cancel the scan  
OK  
Start  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To confirm the destination  
Select <Destinations: > using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To confirm the number of transferred pages  
Select <No. of TX Pages> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
1
Place your document.  
9
Select <Start Sending> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
2
3
Press [  
].  
Select <Windows (SMB)> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Sending>  
<Cancel>  
Select the scan type.  
Destinations: 1  
No. of TX Pages: 1  
Memory Media  
E-Mail  
Windows (SMB)  
The E-mail is sent.  
4
5
Specify the destination.  
Specify destinations in the following ways.  
For details on the setting procedure, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
by selecting a one-touch key  
by selecting a coded dial code  
by selecting a group address  
from the Address book  
Specify the scan settings based on your purpose  
of the scan.  
The following settings can be changed.  
For details on the setting procedure, seeScanningin the e-Manual.  
Scan size  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Density  
Original orientation  
Original Type  
2-Sided Original  
Sharpness  
Data Size  
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task. To  
make the settings effective for all send operations, seeScanningin  
the e-Manual.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Press [  
] (Start).  
Scanning starts.  
When scanning from the feeder, or set the  
<File Format> to <JPEG>  
After scanning the document, the scanned data is sent to  
the USB memory.  
When scanning from the platen glass, or set the  
<File Format> to other than <JPEG>  
Proceed to Step 7.  
7
To continuously scan the document, press [  
(Start).  
]
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Sending>  
<Cancel>  
Destinations: 1  
No. of TX Pages: 1  
To Cancel the scan  
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To confirm the destination  
Select <Destinations: > using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
To confirm the number of transferred pages  
Select <No. of TX Pages> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].  
8
Select <Start Sending> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Scan Next: Press Start  
<Start Sending>  
<Cancel>  
Destinations: 1  
No. of TX Pages: 1  
The scanned file is sent.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
8
Maintenance  
This chapter describes the maintenance of this machine, replacement of the toner cartridges, and so on.  
Cleaning the Machine  
8-2  
Cleaning the Exterior  
8-2  
8-2  
8-3  
8-3  
8-3  
8-4  
Cleaning the Fixing Unit  
Cleaning the Platen Glass  
Cleaning the Feeder  
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically  
Precautions When Cleaning the Machine  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
8-5  
When a Message Appears (D1370/D1350 Only)  
When White Streaks Appear on the Output or  
the Output Is Partially Faded  
8-5  
8-5  
8-6  
8-6  
8-6  
8-7  
8-7  
8-7  
8-8  
8-8  
8-9  
Supplied Toner Cartridge  
About Replacement Toner Cartridge  
Handling Toner Cartridge  
Storing Toner Cartridges  
Using the Toner Saver Mode  
Purchasing Consumables  
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Precautions When Replacing Toner Cartridge  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
8-11  
The Clean Earth Campaign  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
8-11  
8-11  
8-11  
8-12  
8-13  
Packaging  
Shipping  
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME  
Relocating the Machine  
8-14  
Precautions When Relocating the Machine  
8-15  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Machine  
3
4
5
Select <Clean Fixing Unit> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Cleaning the Exterior  
Clean the exterior of the machine and ventilation slots.  
Adjustment/Maintenance  
Toner Saver Mode  
Black Text Processi...  
Special Processing  
Clean Fixing Unit  
1
2
Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the  
power cord.  
Clean the exterior of the machine with a soft, well  
wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild  
detergent diluted with water.  
Check if the supported paper is set in the paper  
drawer and press [OK].  
Supported Paper:  
Size: A4, LTR  
Type: Plain, Plain L  
OK  
Check the procedure shown in the display and  
press [OK].  
* The cleaning paper will be printed.  
3
Wait for the machine to dry completely before  
reconnecting the power cord, and then turn ON  
the power.  
Steps (Stare:Press OK)  
1. Print Clean. Sheet  
2. Start Cleaning  
Cleaning the Fixing Unit  
The fixing unit may be dirty under the following conditions. In  
such case, clean the fixing unit.  
• When black streaks appear on the output  
• When the toner cartridge is replaced  
6
7
Load the cleaning paper to the multi-purpose tray  
with the black band side up.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
OK  
Check the screen and press [OK].  
The cleaning begins. It takes approximately 80 seconds to  
complete the process.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Place the cleaning  
sheet with the print  
face up in the mulch-  
purpose tray, and  
press OK.  
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> using [ ] or  
[
] and press [OK].  
Menu  
Scan Settings  
* We recommend that plain paper be loaded when cleaning the  
fixing unit.  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintenan  
When the cleaning does not start  
You cannot use this function when jobs are stored in memory.  
8
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Clean the rollers (A) inside the feeder with a well  
wrung out cloth dampened with water and wipe  
them with a soft, dry cloth.  
Cleaning the Platen Glass  
Follow this procedure to clean the platen glass and under  
surface of the feeder.  
1
2
Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the  
power cord.  
(A)  
Open the feeder.  
4
5
Close the feeder cover.  
3
Clean the platen glass and the under surface of  
the feeder.  
(1) Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water.  
(2) Wipe the areas with a soft, dry cloth.  
Connect the power cord and turn ON the power  
switch.  
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically  
If your document has black streaks or appears dirty after it has  
been scanned from the feeder, the rollers inside the feeder  
may be dirty. Clean the roller using blank paper.  
4
5
Close the feeder.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
Connect the power cord and turn ON the power  
switch.  
Cleaning the Feeder  
If your document has black streaks or appear dirty after it has  
been scanned from the feeder, the roller inside the feeder may  
be dirty. Clean the feeder scanning area and rollers.  
OK  
1
2
Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the  
power cord.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> using [ ] or  
Open the feeder cover.  
[
] and press [OK].  
Menu  
Scan Settings  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintenan  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
4
Select <Clean Feeder> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
NOTE  
About sending or receiving faxes  
When the power plug is unplugged, the machine cannot send or  
receive faxes.  
Adjustment/Maintenance  
Black Text Processi...  
Special Processing  
Clean Fixing Unit  
Clean Feeder  
When a job is waiting to be printed  
The job is deleted when you turn OFF the power switch.  
About jobs stored in memory  
Jobs can be stored in memory for approximately an hour after the  
power plug has been unplugged. To view jobs stored in memory,  
see the following.  
Load 10 sheets of A4 or Letter size plain paper in  
the feeder, and then press [OK].  
The cleaning begins. It takes approximately 44 seconds to  
complete the process.  
Clean Feeder  
Load 10 sheets of A4  
or LTR in feeder.  
Start  
5
Press [  
] (Menu) to close the menu screen.  
Precautions When Cleaning the Machine  
Before cleaning the machine, note the following.  
• Make sure that no jobs are stored in memory before  
turning OFF the power switch and disconnecting the  
power cord.  
• Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.  
• Do not clean the machine components with tissue paper,  
paper towels, or similar materials. These materials tend to  
stick to the components or generate static charges.  
CAUTION  
Precautions to take when cleaning the feeder  
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the  
document or damage the machine.  
Precautions to take when closing the feeder  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Precautions to take when you get toner onto your  
hands or into clothing  
If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them  
immediately with cold water.  
The toner sets onto hands or into clothing if you try to wash  
it with warm water. Once it is set, you can hardly remove the  
toner stains.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
Toner cartridges are consumables. When the toner becomes  
nearly empty or has run out completely in the middle of a  
job run, a message appears on the screen, or the following  
problems may occur. Take the appropriate action accordingly.  
IMPORTANT  
When white streaks appear on the output, or the output  
is partially faded  
When white streaks appear on the output or the output is partially  
faded, the toner cartridge has almost reached the end of its life,  
even if no message appears on the screen. When the print quality  
becomes unacceptable, see the following to fix the problem.  
White streaks appear on the output, or the output is  
partially faded.  
When White Streaks Appear on the  
Output or the Output Is Partially Faded  
IMPORTANT  
About toner cartridges  
For more information on toner cartridges, see the following  
sections.  
When the toner nearly runs out, white streaks appear on the  
output, or the output is partially faded.  
*
The average yield of replacement toner cartridges varies from  
that of the supplied toner cartridge.  
When a Message Appears (D1370/D1350 Only)  
*
*
No message appears on the screen, if the toner nearly runs out.  
Replace the toner cartridge when white streaks appear on the  
output, or the output is partially faded.  
Do not perform <Copy Image Adjustment> in such situations  
above. Even you try to adjust using this function, the condition  
may not be improved.  
When the toner becomes nearly empty in the middle of a job  
run, a message appears on the screen.  
When the  
message is  
Message displayed  
on the  
When this problem occurs  
Descriptions and Solutions  
screen  
Shake the toner cartridge to evenly  
Follow the steps in the procedure below before replacing  
the toner cartridge. The machine continues printing until  
the toner runs out completely.  
When  
the toner  
cartridge  
needs a  
<Prepare  
toner  
cartridge.>  
We recommend that the toner cartridge be  
replacement replaced before printing high-volume  
soon.  
When the print quality is still unacceptable  
If the problem persists after you have followed the steps in  
the procedure below, replace the toner cartridge.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supplied Toner Cartridge  
CAUTION  
The average yield of the toner cartridge that comes with the  
machine is as follows.  
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge  
Be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into  
direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact  
with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated  
or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately.  
Canon Cartridge  
120 Starter  
Average yield*1 : 2,300 sheets  
*1  
The average yield is on the basis ofISO/IEC 19752”*2 when printing  
A4 size paper with the default print density setting.  
“ISO/IEC 19752is the global standard related toMethod for  
the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic  
electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that  
contain printer componentsissued by ISO (International  
Organization for Standardization).  
When removing a toner cartridge  
*2  
Make sure to remove it carefully. If not removed with care,  
the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with  
your eyes and mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth,  
wash them immediately with cold water and consult a  
physician.  
The average yield of the replacement toner cartridge varies  
from that of the supplied toner cartridge.  
Keep the toner cartridge away from small children.  
If the toner or other parts are ingested, consult a physician  
immediately.  
About Replacement Toner Cartridge  
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.  
Purchase replacement toner cartridges from your local  
authorized Canon dealer.  
The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If  
toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately  
with cold water and consult a physician.  
Use the table below as a guide for replacing the toner  
cartridge. Note that you may need to replace the toner  
cartridge earlier than the suggested replacement interval,  
depending on where the machine is installed, what kinds of  
paper used for printing, and what types of documents that you  
are printing.  
IMPORTANT  
Handling toner cartridges  
Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens, disk  
drives, and floppy disks. They may be damaged by magnet  
which is in inside of the toner cartridge.  
Canon genuine  
Replacement Intervals  
toner cartridge  
Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or  
rapid changes in temperature.  
Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright  
light for more than five minutes.  
Store the toner cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open  
the bag until you are ready to install the toner cartridge in the  
machine.  
Canon Cartridge 120  
Average yield*1: 5,000 sheets  
*1  
The average yield is on the basis ofISO/IEC 19752”*2 when printing  
A4 size paper with the default print density setting.  
*2 “ISO/IEC 19752is the global standard related toMethod for  
the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic  
electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that  
contain printer componentsissued by ISO (International  
Organization for Standardization).  
Keep the protective bag for the toner cartridge. They are  
required when transporting the machine.  
Do not store the toner cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where  
there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.  
Do not remove the toner cartridge from the machine  
unnecessarily.  
Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to  
light or is damaged.  
Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle to avoid touching  
the drum.  
IMPORTANT  
About replacement toner cartridges  
For optimum print quality, when you replace the toner cartridge,  
using Canon genuine one is recommended.  
Model name  
Supported Canon GenuineToner Cartridge  
D1370/D1350/  
D1320  
Canon Cartridge 120  
Do not place the toner cartridge in an upright or an upside  
down position. If the toner is kept upright or upside down, the  
toner will solidify and may not return to its original condition  
even if it is shaken.  
When disposing of a used toner cartridge, place the toner  
container into its protective bag to prevent the toner from  
scattering, and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to  
local regulations.  
Handling Toner Cartridge  
Note the following when handling the toner cartridge.  
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges.  
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges  
in the marketplace.  
Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or  
machine performance.  
WARNING  
Do not place the toner cartridge in fire.  
This may cause toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite  
and result in burns.  
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage  
caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.  
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Storing Toner Cartridges  
1
2
Press [  
] (Menu).  
Be aware of the following points when storing a new toner  
cartridge or handling the toner cartridge that was taken out  
of the machine for maintenance or relocating the machine  
somewhere.  
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> using [ ] or  
[
] and press [OK].  
Menu  
Scan Settings  
IMPORTANT  
USB Direct Print Se...  
Printer Settings  
Adjustment/Maintenan  
Precautions when storing toner cartridges  
To use toner cartridges in a safe and trouble-free manner, store  
them in a place that fulfills the following conditions.  
Do not store toner cartridges in a location exposed to direct  
sunlight.  
3
4
Select <Toner Saver Mode> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
Do not store toner cartridges in a location subject to high  
temperature or humidity or in a location with dramatic changes  
in temperature or humidity.  
- Storage temperature range: 32 to 95°F (0 to 35°C)  
- Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (no condensation)  
Do not store toner cartridges in a place where corrosive gases,  
such as ammonia, are generated, or where a considerable  
amount of salt is contained in the air, or where there is a lot of  
dust.  
Adjustment/Maintenance  
Copy Image Adjustme...  
Printer Density  
Toner Saver Mode  
Black Text Processi...  
Keep toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.  
Keep toner cartridges away from products that may be damaged  
by magnetism, such as a floppy disk or disk drive.  
Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
Store toner cartridges in the same orientation as when  
they are installed in the machine.  
Do not store toner cartridges vertically or upside-down.  
Toner Saver Mode  
Off  
On  
When removing the toner cartridge which is being used  
from the machine  
Immediately place the removed toner cartridge into the original  
protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.  
About a new toner cartridge  
Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag until it  
is ready to be used.  
<Off>  
<On>  
Disable the toner saver mode.  
Enable the toner saver mode.  
NOTE  
When the <Toner Saver Mode> is set to <On>  
The amount of toner used can be conserved. Note that the output  
may not be clear, as subtle details such as thin lines and light colors  
may not be clearly reproduced.  
NOTE  
About condensation  
Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets may  
develop both inside and outside toner cartridges. The formation of  
water droplets is called condensation.  
Condensation will adversely affect the quality of toner cartridges.  
5
Press [  
] (Menu) to return to the standby mode.  
Using the Toner Saver Mode  
Purchasing Consumables  
You can specify whether to conserve the amount of toner used  
for copying and faxing.  
To purchase replacement toner cartridges, contact your local  
authorized Canon dealer.  
To find a dealer near, contact the Canon help line.  
NOTE  
To conserve the amount of toner used for printing  
Enable [Toner Save] on the [Quality] tab of the printer driver.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Menu  
OK  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4
5
Insert the toner cartridge.  
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Fit (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located  
on both sides of the machine and slide the toner cartridge into the  
machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against  
the back of the machine.  
Before replacing toner cartridges, see“Precautions When  
When the toner nearly runs out, follow the steps in the  
procedure below before replacing the toner cartridge.  
The machine continues printing until the toner runs out  
completely.  
1
Open the front cover while holding down the  
open button.  
(A)  
(A)  
Close the front cover.  
If you cannot close the front cover  
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly. Do not  
try to forcefully close the toner cover, as this may damage the  
machine.  
If there are white lines in the print result or it is blurred or  
distorted even though the above operations have been  
performed, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Before replacing toner cartridges, see“Precautions When  
2
3
Remove the toner cartridge.  
1
Open the front cover while holding down the  
open button.  
Gently shake the toner cartridge five or six times  
to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
3
Remove the toner cartridge.  
7
8
Insert the toner cartridge.  
Fit (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located  
on both sides of the machine and slidethe toner cartridge into the  
machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against  
the back of the machine.  
Take out the new toner cartridge from the  
protective bag.  
(A)  
(A)  
You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch.  
*
Keep the protective bag. You will need them when you remove  
the toner cartridge for printer maintenance or other purposes.  
Close the front cover.  
If you cannot close the front cover  
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly. Do not  
try to forcefully close the toner cover, as this may damage the  
machine.  
4
Gently shake the toner cartridge five or six times  
to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.  
Precautions When Replacing Toner Cartridge  
Safety Instructionsas well.  
WARNING  
Do not dispose of a used toner cartridge in an open  
flame.  
5
6
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.  
This may ignite the toner remaining inside the cartridge,  
resulting in burns or fire.  
Fold the tab, and the pull out the sealing tapes  
(approximately 20” (50 cm)).  
CAUTION  
Precautions to take when you get toner onto your  
hands or clothing  
If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them  
immediately with cold water.  
The toner sets onto hands or into clothing if you try to  
wash it with warm water. Once it is set, you can hardly  
remove the toner stains.  
Be careful not to scatter the toner.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop pulling  
the tape halfway, as this may cause toner to spill out.  
Precautions when pulling out the sealing tape  
Do not pull the sealing tape at an angle or up and down. If the tape  
breaks, it may not be pulled out completely.  
If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them  
immediately with cold water and consult a physician.  
Front View  
If the sealing tape is still hanging outside the toner cartridge, pull  
it out completely. If the tape remains inside the toner cartridge,  
it may cause poor print quality. If you are using the Fax, please  
note that you can only print the received data once, because the  
received data is deleted once it is printed.  
Dispose of the sealing tape according to local regulations.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (D) or the  
electrical contacts (E).  
This may result in damage to the cartridge.  
IMPORTANT  
About replacement toner cartridges  
For optimum print quality, when you replace the toner cartridge,  
using Canon genuine one is recommended.  
Model Name  
Supported Canon GenuineToner Cartridge  
D1370/D1350/  
D1320  
Canon Cartridge 120  
(E)  
Be Careful of Counterfeit Toner Cartridges.  
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges  
in the marketplace.  
Use of counterfeit toner cartridges may result in poor print quality  
or machine performance.  
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage  
caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridges.  
For more information, see the following Web site.  
http://www.canon.com/counterfeit  
(D)  
Miscellaneous precautions  
Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or strong  
light.  
Never disassemble or modify it.  
Condensation may form in and on the toner cartridge if it is  
brought into an environment that exposes it to sudden changes  
in temperature and/or humidity.  
If you move the toner cartridge to a location that is warmer or  
has higher humidity, leave the cartridge in the new location for  
2 hours or longer without opening the protective bag to allow it  
to adjust to the new temperature.  
Shake the toner cartridge before replacement.  
If the toner is not distributed evenly inside the cartridge, this may  
cause poor print quality.  
Hold the toner cartridges properly.  
When handling the toner cartridge, hold it properly, as shown in  
the illustration below. Do not stand it vertically or hold it upside  
down.  
Do not leave the front cover open for a long time with the toner  
cartridges installed.  
Keep the toner cartridge away from equipment that generates  
magnetic fields, such as LCD displays and computers.  
A toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep the toner cartridge  
away from products that may be damaged by magnetism, such  
as a floppy disk or disk drive. This may lead to damage to data.  
NOTE  
About the packing materials  
The packing materials are subject to change in form or placement,  
or may be added or removed without notice.  
Do not touch the electrical contacts (A) or the toner  
cartridge memory (B), and do not open the drum  
protective cover (C).  
Touching the electrical contacts (A) or the toner cartridge memory  
(B) may result in damage to the machine.  
Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the  
photoconductor drum. Never touch it or open the drum protective  
cover (C).  
When <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low> is set to  
<On>  
The machine continues printing the received fax if the toner  
cartridge is not replaced. Note that the output may not be clear, as  
subtle details such as thin lines and light colors may not be clearly  
reproduced, due to a small amount of toner remaining inside the  
toner cartridge. Plus, the data is deleted once it has been printed.  
(A)  
Bottom View  
(B)  
(C)  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges calledThe Clean Earth Campaign.  
This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used  
cartridges  
that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the  
environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste.  
Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.  
The Clean Earth Campaign  
THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM  
The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth Campaign, which  
supports four critical environmental areas:  
• Recycling in the Workplace  
• Conserving Environmental Resources  
• Scientific Research and Education  
• Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation  
The remainingClean Earthinitiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of the National Park Foundation, the National  
Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The  
Nature Conservancy of Canada.  
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount of cartridges that otherwise would have  
been discarded into landfills or similar facilities.  
Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process, thus conserving an array of resources.  
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions  
detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.  
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.  
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.  
• Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.  
• You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.  
• This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
Packaging  
Option A-1: Single Box Return  
• Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s box.  
• Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Option B: Volume Box Return  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
• Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.  
Carefully seal the box with tape;  
or  
• Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.  
Option A-2: Multiple Box Return  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
• Complete Option A-1.  
• Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.  
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications.  
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)  
Maximum length = 108(2,743 mm)  
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130(3,302 mm)  
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special shipping information.  
Please Note:  
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.  
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the  
warranty.  
Shipping  
Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.  
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska and Hawaii Canon set up alternative  
mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.  
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.  
• Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery; (UPS may charge a fee for customers who  
call UPS to pick up a cartridge shipment if they do not already have a delivery scheduled.)  
or  
• Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME  
Option A: Single Box Return  
• Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s box.  
• Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.  
• Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon  
pays the postage.  
• Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.  
Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
• Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.  
• The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.  
• Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon collection box. Seal the box.  
• Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.  
• Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.  
• Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post  
may have their collection box picked up.  
Working to preserve endangered species is a long-standing Canon interest.  
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the  
Nature Conservancy of Canada. This donation is utilized in Canada.  
• For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write to Canon.  
1-800-667-2666  
Canon Canada Inc.  
Corporate Customer Relations  
6390 Dixie Road  
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Relocating the Machine  
Before transporting the machine, see“Precautions When  
4
Carry the machine to the new installation site.  
After making sure that the cover and tray are closed, hold the  
handle on the front to lift and transport the machine. Check the  
weight of the machine so it can be carried safely.  
Follow the steps in the procedure below to relocate the  
machine somewhere else for maintenance and other purposes.  
1
Turn the power OFF, then disconnect the cables  
and cord from the machine.  
(2)  
(5)  
OFF  
(3)  
(4)  
(7)  
(6)  
ON  
When the optional paper feeder is installed  
(1)  
Remove the paper feeder from the machine, install it in the new  
installation site, then transport the machine.  
OFF  
* Do not carry the machine with the paper feeder installed. If you  
do so, the paper feeder may drop, resulting in personal injury.  
<How to remove the cables and cord>  
(2) Turn the computer off.  
(3) Remove it from the machine.  
USB cable*  
LAN cable*  
(4) Remove it from the machine.  
(5) Unplug the power plug from the  
AC power outlet.  
(6) Remove it from the machine.  
Power cord  
(7) Remove it from the machine.  
Telephone cables*  
* Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on  
your environment.  
5
Put the machine down carefully at the new  
installation site.  
2
3
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.  
NOTE  
Installation procedures  
See the Starter Guide that comes with the machine.  
When transporting the machine long distance  
To prevent damage to the machine during transport,  
perform the following.  
• Remove the toner cartridges  
*
• Securely pack the printer in the original box with  
packing materials  
Pull out the paper drawer.  
* If the original box and packing materials are not available,  
find an appropriate box along with packing materials and  
pack the machine and the parts appropriately.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Precautions When Relocating the Machine  
WARNING  
When relocating the machine  
Be sure to turn off the power switches of the machine and  
your computer, and unplug the power plug and interface  
cables.  
Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting  
in a fire or electrical shock.  
CAUTION  
Set the machine down slowly and carefully.  
Be careful not to hurt your hands or fingers.  
IMPORTANT  
Do not carry the machine with the covers or trays open.  
Make sure that the scanning platform and paper drawer are closed  
before lifting, carrying, and relocating the machine.  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
9
Troubleshooting  
This chapter describes solutions for cases such as paper jam and when problems are not  
solved.  
Clearing Jams  
9-2  
Document Jams in the Feeder  
9-2  
9-4  
9-4  
9-4  
9-5  
9-5  
9-6  
Paper Jams in the Output Area  
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray  
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer (Drawer 1 or 2)  
Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex Unit  
Paper Jams in the Front Cover  
Paper Jams in the 2-sided Transport Guide  
Onscreen Message  
9-8  
9-8  
Error Codes  
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears  
Troubleshooting  
9-11  
9-12  
Check the Following First  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-12  
9-13  
Is the power switched ON?  
Has the power switch been just turned ON?  
Is the machine in the sleep mode?  
Are the settings properly configured?  
Is the Error indicator on or blinking?  
Does a message appear on the screen?  
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly? (D1370/D1350  
Only)  
9-13  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
9-13  
When a Power Failure Occurs  
Printing Results Are Not Good  
9-14  
9-15  
Paper Curls  
9-15  
9-16  
9-17  
Paper Creases  
Vertical Streaks Appear on the Output  
Toner Smudges and Spatters Appear around Text and Images 9-18  
The Bottom Edge of Paper or Following Paper Has Smudge Marks  
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed  
9-18  
9-19  
When a Problem Cannot Be Resolved  
9-20  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Customer Support (Canada)  
9-20  
9-20  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Do not touch the transfer roller (C)  
This may result in deterioration of print quality.  
Safety Instructionsas well.  
(C)  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Do not touch the feeder roller (D)  
This may result in malfunctions or damage to the machine.  
When <Paper jam.> appears on the screen, a paper jam has  
occurred in the feeder or somewhere inside the machine. To  
remove the jammed document or paper, follow the onscreen  
instructions.  
(D)  
IMPORTANT  
Perform the operation while the machine is still ON  
If it is turned OFF, the data that is printing will be erased.  
NOTE  
If the jammed paper is torn  
Remove all torn pieces of paper to avoid further jams.  
Do not force the jammed document or paper out of the  
machine.  
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line  
for assistance, if needed.  
If paper jams occur repeatedly  
Check the followings.  
Fan the paper stack and tap the edge on a flat surface to align  
the paper before loading it into the machine.  
Make sure that the paper you are using meets the requirements  
for use.  
Document Jams in the Feeder  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper  
Types  
Make sure that you have removed all scraps of paper from the  
inside of the machine.  
Follow onscreen instructions as well as the ones provided in  
this section to remove jammed documents.  
1
Press [ ].  
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (A) or the  
electrical contacts (B)  
This may result in damage to the machine.  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
2
3
Remove the document loaded in the feeder.  
Open the feeder cover.  
(B)  
(A)  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Move the release lever (A) to the position shown  
in the figure.  
9
Put the document feeder tray back into place.  
(A)  
10 Close inner cover.  
Remove the jammed document by pulling it  
gently.  
11 Close the feeder cover.  
6
7
Open the inner cover.  
12 Open the feeder or the platen glass cover and  
remove the document by pulling it gently.  
Remove the jammed document by pulling it  
gently.  
8
Lift the document feeder tray and remove the  
document by pulling it gently.  
13 Close the feeder or the platen glass cover gently.  
14 Place document in the feeder.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Jams in the Output Area  
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
1
Press [ ].  
1
Press [ ].  
Paper jam.  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press OK)  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press OK)  
2
Lift the scanning platform.  
2
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
If it cannot be removed easily, do not pull it out forcibly. Perform  
the procedure at the position that is indicated on the message  
display.  
3
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
3
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
using [ ] and press [OK].  
The machine is ready to print.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Yes  
No  
4
5
Lower the scanning platform.  
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer (Drawer  
1 or 2)  
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
using [ ] and press [OK].  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
The machine is ready to print.  
1
Press [ ].  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.  
Paper jam.  
Yes  
No  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press OK)  
2
Pull out the paper drawer halfway.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
If paper is jammed in the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2), also  
pull out this drawer halfway.  
3
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
4
5
Close the back cover.  
Open the lower rear cover.  
4
5
Set the paper drawer.  
If the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2) is installed, close the  
optional paper drawer also.  
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
using [ ] and press [OK].  
The machine is ready to print.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Yes  
No  
6
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex  
Unit  
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps  
below to remove jammed paper.  
1
Press [ ].  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press OK)  
7
8
Close the lower rear cover.  
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
using [ ] and press [OK].  
The machine is ready to print.  
2
Open the back cover.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Yes  
No  
Paper Jams in the Front Cover  
1
Press [ ].  
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.  
3
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
Close back cover  
if it is open.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
3
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.  
8
9
Hold the part where the green seal is attached  
and open the roller cover.  
Open the front cover while holding down the  
open button.  
Remove the document by pulling it gently.  
10 Put the roller cover back in place gently.  
11 Insert the toner cartridge.  
4
5
Remove the toner cartridge.  
Immediately place the toner cartridge into the original protective  
bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.  
Fit (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located  
on both sides of the machine and slide the toner cartridge into the  
machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against  
the back of the machine.  
Hold the green tabs (A), and push the transport  
guide forward and down.  
Do not take your hands off the transport guide until it has reached  
the original position in Step 7.  
(A)  
(A)  
(A)  
12 Close the front cover.  
Paper Jams in the 2-sided Transport Guide  
6
7
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
1
Press [ ].  
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.  
Remove it as horizontally as possible so that loose toner does not  
spill out.  
Paper jam.  
Press [ ] to  
display steps.  
(End: Press OK)  
2
Pull out the paper drawer.  
Slowly move the transport guide to its original  
position.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Holding the green tabs (A), open the 2-sided  
transport guide.  
(A)  
4
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out  
gently.  
5
Holding the green tabs, close the 2-sided  
transport guide securely.  
Make sure that both ends of the paper exit guide are closed.  
6
7
Set the paper drawer.  
When the following screen appears, select <Yes>  
using [ ] and press [OK].  
The machine is ready to print.  
Is all of the jammed  
paper removed?  
Yes  
No  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Onscreen Message  
If messages appear, see the following and solve the problem.  
e-Manual Troubleshooting Onscreen Messages  
Error Codes  
An error code is a 3-digit code recorded in the error log when an error occurs.  
You can view the code in the following reports and log:  
• Error send report  
• Error receive report  
Error codes  
• Job history displayed on the system status screen  
01/01/201102:07PMFAX  
123XXXXXXX  
CANON  
P.0001  
***********************  
*** ***  
Error Report (Send)  
***********************  
Send job resulted in error.  
Job No.  
Address  
Name  
0123  
0123456789  
name  
Start Time  
01/01 02:07 AM  
Call Length  
Sheets  
Result  
01'15  
1
NG  
#018  
Busy/No Signal  
Error code  
For more information on the reports, refer to the following.  
e-Manual Basic Operation Printing the Report Automatically (D1370/D1350 Only)  
For details on the error code, see the following.  
Problem  
Action  
A document jam has occurred.  
#001  
Remove the jammed document.  
Problem  
The machine is taking considerable time to send high-volume data.  
Reduce the scan resolution and try to send the document again.  
Reduce the scan resolution or ask the sender to split the document into smaller subsets and send one subset at a time.  
#003 Action 1  
Action 2  
Problem 1 The receiving fax machine did not respond within 35 seconds.  
Repeat the sending procedure from the beginning. Additionally, ask the recipient to check the fax machine. When making  
an overseas call, add a pause to the fax number.  
Action  
#005  
#012  
Problem 2 The receiving fax machine may not be a G3 fax machine.  
Make sure the receiving fax machine is a G3 fax machine. If it is a G3 fax machine, send the document again. Otherwise,  
switch to the communication mode supported by the receiving fax machine and send the document again.  
Action  
Problem  
Action  
The receiving fax machine is out of paper.  
Make sure that there is enough paper loaded in the receiving fax machine's paper tray.  
Problem 1 No response is obtained after redialing the number. The line may be busy or disconnected.  
Wait a few seconds before trying to dial the number again. Make sure that the receiving fax machine is ready to receive a  
document if you still cannot send a fax. Wait a few more seconds before trying to dial the number again if the line is still  
busy.  
Action  
Problem 2 You cannot send a fax because the line is busy or disconnected.  
Action Make sure that the receiving fax machine is ready to receive a document and try to dial the number again.  
Problem 3 The settings configured on the receiving fax machine may not be the same with your fax machine.  
Action Make sure that the receiving fax machine is ready to receive a document and try to dial the number again.  
#018  
Problem 4 No pause was added to the fax number when sending a fax overseas.  
Add a pause after the country code or in front of the fax number and dial the number again. When sending a fax to a  
destination registered in a one-touch key, switch to the overseas transmission mode on the detailed setup screen.  
Action  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Problem  
Action  
You are restricted to send faxes from your computer.  
You need to disable the restriction. Contact your administrator for more information.  
e-Manual Security Restricting to Specify Destinations and Use the Sending Functions (D1370/D1350 Only) →  
Restricting to Send Faxes from Your Computer  
#022  
#037  
Problem 1 The machine memory is full.  
Action  
Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.  
Problem 2 The data size exceeds the machine's memory capacity.  
Action  
Reduce the data resolution or change the file format to reduce the data size.  
Problem 3 The memory is full when using the secure printing.  
Print the documents in several batches or send the job without using the secure printing.  
Action  
e-Manual Security Entering PIN for Printing (Secure Printing) (D1370 Only) Setting Secure Printing  
Problem 1 An abbreviation of the sender's name or sender's fax number is not registered when the sender sends a fax from a computer.  
Action  
Register an abbreviation of the sender's name as well as the sender's fax number.  
#054  
#099  
The destination number is more than 40 digits long when sending a fax from a computer or importing from the address  
book.  
Problem 2  
Action  
Problem  
Action  
Reduce the number of digits to less than 40.  
A job currently being processed has been canceled manually.  
Try to send or receive the document again.  
Problem 1 The memory media was disconnected while it was being written to, and writing failed.  
Action Check to see if the memory media was disconnected, and try writing again.  
Problem 2 An error occurs when transferring images to memory media, and images cannot be transferred normally.  
Action Check the memory media status, and then repeat the operation.  
Problem 3 The connected memory media is formatted with an unsupported file system.  
Action Make sure that the memory media is formatted with a file system that is supported by the machine (FAT16 or FAT32).  
Problem 1 Failed the authentication of ID or PIN in the Departmental ID Management.  
Action Specify the correct dept. ID or PIN and redo the authentication.  
#408  
Problem 2 The jobs with unknown IDs are restricted.  
#701  
#703  
Need to deactivate the restriction. Contact the system manager (administrator) for the details  
Action  
e-Manual Security Specifying the Setting for Department ID Management Specifying Whether or Not to Receive  
a Print Job from an Unknown ID  
Problem  
Action 1  
Action 2  
Action 3  
The image region in the memory is full. Cannot write.  
Wait until other TX jobs are completed before resending.  
Delete the documents saved in the memory. If it still does not work, please turn the machine OFF and then ON again.  
Split the document into smaller subsets and send it.  
Problem 1 The SMTP server name setting is incorrect.  
Select the appropriate SMTP server name.  
Action  
e-Manual Network Settings Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →  
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings  
Problem 2 The domain name setting is incorrect.  
Select the appropriate domain name.  
#752  
#753  
Action  
e-Manual Network Settings Additional Network Settings Setting IPv4 DNS  
e-Manual Network Settings Additional Network Settings Setting IPv6 DNS  
Problem 3 The network is not connected.  
Action  
Problem  
Action  
Check with your network administrator to make sure that the network is operating normally.  
TCP/IP errors occur when sending files or e-mails. (socket and select errors, etc.)  
Make sure that the network cable connector between the machine and the computer is plugged in securely.  
Problem 1 Cannot send because TCP/IP is not running properly.  
Check <TCP/IP Settings>.  
Action  
e-Manual Network Settings  
Problem 2 The IP address is not set.  
Enter the IP address.  
Action  
#755  
e-Manual Network Settings Basic Network Settings Setting the IP Address  
Problem 3 When the machine was started up, IP addresses were not assigned by either DHCP, RARP or BOOTP.  
After the machine is turned ON, the machine cannot communicate with the network until the time specified in <Startup  
Settings> has elapsed. Wait a few seconds before resending.  
Action  
e-Manual Network Settings Additional Network Settings Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network  
Connection  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem 1 Whenever it communicates with the SMTP server in order to send e-mail, a timeout caused by the mail server side occurs.  
Action Check to make sure the SMTP is operating normally. Check the network status.  
Problem 2 During SMTP connection, an error is returned from the SMTP server.  
Action Recheck your SMTP server settings.  
Problem 3 The destination setting is not correct.  
Action Check the destination settings.  
Problem 4 When sending to a file server, an error caused by the server side occurs.  
#801  
Action  
Check to make sure the file server is operating normally.  
The SMTP server name setting is incorrect.  
Problem  
Select the appropriate SMTP server name.  
#802  
#804  
Action  
e-Manual Network Settings Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →  
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings  
Problem  
Action  
No access privileges to folder.  
Make sure that the user name and password that is registered for the destination matches the user account (user name and  
password) that is registered in the computer (file server).  
Problem 1 When sending to a file server, the specified user name and password are incorrect.  
Make sure that the user name and password that is registered for the destination matches the user account (user name and  
password) that is registered in the computer (file server).  
Action  
#806  
Problem 2 When sending e-mail, the specified destination is incorrect.  
Action  
Check the registered e-mail destination settings.  
Problem  
Action 1  
While connecting to the POP server, an error is returned from the POP server.  
Check to see if the POP server address is entered correctly.  
#810  
#812  
Check with your network administrator to make sure that the mail server is operating normally and that the network is  
operating normally.  
Action 2  
Problem  
Action  
The POP password setting is incorrect.  
Enter the correct POP password. Check the POP password in the settings notification documentation, etc. issued by the  
contracted provider, or ask the network administrator.  
Problem  
Action  
The POP login name setting is incorrect.  
#813  
#822  
Recheck your POP login name setting.  
Problem  
Action  
The job cannot be printed due to incorrect image format.  
Repeat the operation.  
Problem  
The user name and password setting used for SMTP authentication is incorrect.  
Set the user name and password correctly.  
#839  
Action  
Problem  
Action  
e-Manual Network Settings Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →  
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings  
The error has occurred during the POP authentication.  
Recheck the setting and redo the operation.  
#846  
#852  
e-Manual Network Settings Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →  
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings  
Problem  
Action  
The error has occurred by shutting down the power switch while processing jobs.  
Recheck the setting and redo the operation.  
The job was not able to be processed due to the reason why it was canceled from an application or operating system while  
the print data was being sent to this machine from a computer etc.  
Problem 1  
Action  
Check the settings, and then repeat the operation.  
Problem 2 While performing the secure printing, the job has been canceled for running out of time to process.  
Action Start over the job as necessary.  
#853  
#995  
Problem 3 The job using the secure printing has been sent when <Secure Print Settings> is turned <Off>.  
Set <Secure Print Settings> to <On>. Or send the job without the secure printing.  
Action  
e-Manual Security Entering PIN for Printing (Secure Printing) Setting Secure Printing  
Problem  
Action  
A document waiting to be sent or received has been canceled.  
Try to send or receive the document again.  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears  
This message appears when the paper size loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray does not match the size specified in  
<Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>, or <Multi-Purpose Tray> in the <Paper Settings> menu. When this message appears, follow the steps in  
the procedure below.  
NOTE  
Ignore the message and proceed to print  
You can print on paper currently set in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray if you press [OK] to ignore the message. Note that this may cause  
unexpected print results, for example, a part of the image may not be printed at all.  
Changing the paper size in the <Paper Settings> menu to match the size loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray  
Cancel the job and refer to  
e-Manual Basic Operation Setting the Paper Size and Type For the Paper Drawer, to  
change the paper size in <Paper Settings> menu.  
IMPORTANT  
When printing from the printer driver  
Make sure that the paper size specified in the printer driver also matches the size loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.  
Loading the paper size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu  
See“Loading Paper(P. 2-9) and load the size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu.  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
If a problem occurs while the machine is in use, try the actions suggested in this section before contacting technical support  
Check the Following First  
Is the power switched ON?  
Make sure that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet.  
Make sure that electricity is supplied from the power cord.  
Use another power cord or check to see if the cord is broken using a voltmeter.  
Turn ON the power switch.  
If this works  
Has the power switch been just turned ON?  
Wait a few moments until the machine starts and warms up.  
If this works  
Is the machine in the sleep mode?  
Press [  
] (Energy Saver) on the operation panel to return from the sleep mode.  
If this works  
Are the settings properly configured?  
If the machine makes the error sound and does not start operating even after [  
] (Start) has been  
pressed, the settings may not have been configured properly. Check the configured settings.  
Is the Error indicator on or blinking?  
Make sure that paper is loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.  
Check to see if there is a jam somewhere inside the machine.  
Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.  
After the problem has been solved, the Error indicator goes out and the screen returns to the standby mode. If the Error  
indicator keeps blinking, unplug the power cord and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.  
If this works  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Does a message appear on the screen?  
If an error message appears on the screen, see the following section and try the appropriate action.  
Print the transmission management report to see if the report shows any errors.  
e-Manual Basic Operation Printing List Printing a Communication Management Report (D1370/D1350 Only)  
If this works  
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly? (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Make sure that the telephone cable is properly connected. Make sure that the cables for the telephone line port and external device  
port on the back of the machine are not connected inversely. See the Starter Guide.  
Make sure that the line type (dial or push) specified in the menu matches the type of line connected to the machine.  
Make sure that the telephone line is not receiving interference from nearby devices such as a microwave oven. This may affect  
the status of the telephone line.  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
See “Troubleshooting” in the e-Manual, then solve the problem.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a Power Failure Occurs  
The machine cannot be used while the power supply is cut off.  
When there is a power failure, you can or cannot perform the following fax operations.  
• You cannot send or receive faxes.  
• You may not be able to make a call using the external telephone, depending on your telephone system.  
• You may be able to answer a call using the external telephone, depending on your telephone system.  
IMPORTANT  
To save documents in memory when the power supply is cut off  
If the power is lost due to a power failure or the power cord is accidentally unplugged, data can be stored in memory for approximately 5 minutes  
so you can back it up. To store document in the memory requires the printer’s built-in battery must be charged for more than 6 hours. (The printer’s  
power switch is turned ON for more than 16 hours.)  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing Results Are Not Good  
NOTE  
To contact your local authorized Canon dealer  
When a problem occurs that is not suggested in the e-Manual, or a problem persists if you follow the instructions, or you cannot determine the  
nature of the problem, contact your local authorized Canon dealer  
Paper Curls  
Try one of the following to solve the problem.  
<Cause 1> Damp paper is used.  
Replace the paper stack with new unopened one.  
Solution 1  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types  
Follow the steps in the procedure below when plain paper (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2)) is loaded.  
1. Access the [Page Setup] tab.  
2. Set [Paper Type] to [Plain Paper L].  
Solution 2  
Solution 3  
Change the <Special Mode V> setting from the operation panel.  
e-Manual Maintenance Special Mode  
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.  
<Off> <Mode 1> <Mode 2>  
(low)  
(high)  
* Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage conditions, without needing to  
change the setting.  
* The more effective the setting becomes, the slower the print speed.  
<Cause 2> The paper type loaded is not appropriate.  
Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray meets the  
paper specifications.  
Solution  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Creases  
Try one of the following to solve the problem.  
<Cause 1> The paper stack is not loaded correctly.  
Load the paper stack correctly.  
Solution  
<Cause 2> Damp paper is used.  
Replace the paper stack with new unopened one.  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types  
Solution  
<Cause 3> The paper type loaded is not appropriate.  
Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray meets the  
paper specifications.  
Solution  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types  
<Cause 4> There is a foreign object inside the machine.  
Remove the foreign object from the machine.  
Solution  
<Cause 5> Paper creases due to the paper type used or usage conditions of the machine.  
Change the <Special Mode V> setting from the operation panel.  
e-Manual Maintenance Special Mode  
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.  
<Off> <Mode 1> <Mode 2>  
Solution  
(low)  
(high)  
* Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage conditions, without needing to  
change the setting.  
* The more effective the setting becomes, the slower the print speed.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vertical Streaks Appear on the Output  
Try one of the following to solve the problem.  
<Cause 1> Due to the paper type or usage conditions, vertical streaks appear on the output.  
Replace the paper stack with new unopened one.  
Solution 1  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types  
To copy  
Change the <Special Mode Z> setting from the operation panel.  
To print from USB Direct Print or a computer  
For USB Direct Print, change the <Special Mode X> setting in the operation panel.  
To print from a computer, change the [Special Print Adjustment] setting in the print driver.  
e-Manual Maintenance Special Mode  
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.  
Solution 2  
<Off> <Mode 1> <Mode 2> <Mode 3>  
(low)  
(high)  
* Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without needing to change the setting.  
* The more effective the setting, the lower the density becomes. Additionally, the outline of text and images may be  
reproduced less clearly, and images may appear slightly jagged.  
* If you cannot solve the problem even setting <Special Mode X>, set <Special Mode D> to <On>.  
To print received faxes or the print report  
Change the <Special Mode C> setting to <On> from the operation panel.  
To apply the solutions to all the jobs  
Change the <Special Mode D> setting to <On> in the print driver.  
e-Manual Maintenance Special Mode  
Solution 3  
* Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without needing to change the setting.  
* If you set this option to <On>, the printing speed will be slow.  
<Cause 2> The toner cartridge was replaced recently, or the machine has not printed anything for an extended period of  
time.  
Change the setting of <Special Mode B> from the operation panel.  
e-Manual Maintenance Special Mode  
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.  
<Off> <Mode 1> <Mode 2> <Mode 3>  
(low) (high)  
Solution  
* Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without needing to change the setting.  
* If you set this option to <On>, the printing speed will be slow.  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Toner Smudges and Spatters Appear around Text and Images  
Try one of the following to solve the problem.  
<Cause 1> The paper type loaded is not appropriate.  
Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray meets the  
paper specifications.  
Solution  
e-Manual Specifications Paper Supported Paper Types  
<Cause 2> Due to the paper type (for example, heavy paper) or usage conditions (for example, dry conditions), toner  
smudges and spatters appear on the output.  
Change the <Special Mode U> setting to <On> from the operation panel.  
e-Manual Maintenance Special Mode  
* Set this setting to <Off> unless the above mentioned problem occurs.  
Solution  
* The print quality may become lower when this setting is enabled, depending on the paper type used (for example,  
thin paper) or usage conditions (humid conditions).  
The Bottom Edge of Paper or Following Paper Has Smudge Marks  
Perform following procedure.  
<Cause> A document with no margins was printed.  
Data is printed with a margin of 5 mm (10 mm for envelopes). Provide a margin around the data.  
Solution 1  
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.  
1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.  
2. Click [Advanced Setting].  
Solution 2  
3. Set [Enlarge Print Area] to [Off].  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed  
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.  
<Cause> A document with no margins was printed.  
Data is printed with a margin of 5 mm (10 mm for envelopes). Provide a margin around the data.  
Solution 1  
Solution 2  
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.  
1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.  
2. Click [Advanced Setting].  
3. Set [Enlarge Print Area] to [Off].  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a Problem Cannot Be Resolved  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Customer Support (Canada)  
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information  
in this chapter, contact the Canon Customer Care Center at  
1-800-OK-CANON, Monday through Friday, between 8:00 A.M.  
and 8:00 P.M. EST. On-line support is available 24 hours a day at  
http://www.canontechsupport.com.  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical  
support options*:  
* Available support options are subject to change without notice.  
• To perform step-by-step troubleshooting, send e-mail to  
technical support, download drivers or support documents,  
or view answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://  
www.canon.ca/  
• Free live technical support is available from 9 A.M. to 8  
P.M. EST, Monday through Friday (excluding holidays), for  
products still under warranty 1-800-OK-CANON  
• To find the location of the authorized service facility nearest  
you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or call 1- 800-OK-CANON.  
• If the problem cannot be corrected via these technical  
support options, repair options are available from the  
technical support personnel via the website at http://www.  
canon.ca/  
Please have the following information ready when  
contacting the Canon Customer Care Center:  
• Product name (imageCLASS D1370/D1350/D1320)  
• Serial number (a character string of 3 letters and a 5-digit  
number; located on the rating label on the rear side of the  
machine or on the label on inside of the machine’s front  
cover)  
Please have the following information ready when  
contacting the Canon Customer Care Center:  
• Product name (imageCLASS D1370/D1350/D1320)  
• Serial number (a character string of 3 letters and a 5-digit  
number; located on the rating label on the rear side of the  
machine or on the label on inside of the machine’s front  
cover)  
Rating label  
• Place of purchase  
• Nature of the problem  
• Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
WARNING  
If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or  
an odd odor  
Turn OFF the power switch immediately, disconnect the  
power cord, and contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine  
yourself.  
Rating label  
• Place of purchase  
• Nature of problem  
• Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
IMPORTANT  
If you attempt to fix the machine yourself  
WARNING  
If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or  
an odd odor  
It may void the limited warranty.  
Turn OFF the power switch immediately, disconnect the  
power cord, and contact the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine  
yourself.  
IMPORTANT  
If you attempt to fix the machine yourself  
It may void the limited warranty.  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Registering/Setting the Various Functions  
You can set or change machine functions from the setting menu according to your purpose.  
Setting Menu List  
10-2  
Printing a User Data List  
10-2  
10-2  
Contents of the Setting Menu  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu List  
Printing a User Data List  
3
4
Select <User Data List> using [ ] or [ ] and  
press [OK].  
To see the contents of current settings, print out user’s data list.  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Report  
Print Reports  
Address Book List  
User Data List  
System Manager Data...  
Communication Manag...  
Make sure that paper is loaded in the paper  
source and press [OK].  
OK  
Load the displayed paper size.  
1
2
Press [  
] (Report).  
Supported Paper:  
Size: A4, LTR  
Type: Pln, Rec, Clr  
Select <Print Reports> using [ ] or [ ] and press  
[OK].  
OK  
Reports  
Reports Settings  
Print Reports  
5
6
Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].  
Printing starts.  
Print User Data  
List?  
Yes  
No  
Press [  
screen.  
] (Report) to close <Print Report>  
Contents of the Setting Menu  
[Address Book] key  
[Select Paper/Settings] key  
[Menu] key  
[Report] key  
Register the following types of destination.  
- One-touch keys  
- Coded dialing  
Register the size and type of the  
paper to be used.  
You can also register a custom paper  
size.  
Configure the machine settings.  
You can perform adjustment and  
cleaning.  
You can specify the settings for  
various report output conditions and  
output a report.  
- Group dialing  
Viewing the Route Map  
Menu Operations  
Returns to the previous hierarchy.  
This area represents the first hierarchy in the menu.  
Proceeds to the next hierarchy.  
Timer Settings  
Selects an upper item/setting value.  
Selects a lower item/setting value.  
Proceeds to the next hierarchy. Also, a setting  
This area represents  
hierarchies for "setting values."  
The setting values with the  
gray background or of the  
boldface represents the default  
settings.  
Time&Date Settings  
Date Display Type  
P.1-12  
YYYY MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM YYYY  
value is determined, and an operation is performed.  
* When <Apply> appears in the screen, you need to select <Apply>  
and press [OK] after specifying the setting.  
These represents reference areas in this manual.  
For the items with the icon, see the e-Manual.  
Back  
Reset  
This area represents hierarchies for "setting item."  
Returns to the previous hierarchy.  
About the menu options in the following chart  
• The settings marked with "*1" are only for D1370.  
• The settings marked with "*2" are only for D1370/D1350.  
Resets the settings. (Resets the copy/scan/fax/USB  
direct print mode.)  
• For values with "*3" mark, the default value varies depending on the country where you are using the machine.  
• The settings marked with "*4" cannot be imported or exported via the Remote UI.  
Press [  
] (Menu) to exit the menu screen and return to the default screen.  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Address Book (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Menu  
<How to display>  
<How to display>  
Press [Menu].  
Press [FAX] or [SCAN].  
Press [Address Book].  
Press [ ] to select [  
The setting menu is displayed.  
1
3
2
4
1
2
The address book is displayed.  
], and then press [OK].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Keys to be used for this operation  
1
1
2
2
3
4
Coded Dial  
Fax  
Network Settings  
TCP/IP Settings  
IPv4 Settings  
Max 16 characters  
Max 40  
Name  
Destination  
Set Details  
IP Address Settings  
Auto Obtain  
Select Protocol  
Off  
ECM TX  
Off  
On  
DHCP  
BOOTP  
RARP  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
4800 bps  
Speed  
Off  
Auto IP  
On  
Domestic  
Long Distance  
Manual Obtain  
International (1)  
International (2)  
International (3)  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Coded Dial:Registration No.  
E-Mail  
Gateway Address  
View Settings  
Max 16 characters  
Max 120 characters  
Name  
Auto Obtain  
Destination  
IP Address  
Coded Dial:Registration No.  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
Group  
Max 16 characters  
Name  
PING Command  
DNS Settings  
Select Coded Dial/One-Touch Dial  
Destination  
Coded Dial:Registration No.  
DNS Server Settings  
Primary DNS Server  
One-Touch  
Fax  
Enter Registration No.  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Secondary DNS Server  
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings  
Max 16 characters  
Max 40  
Name  
Host Name  
Destination  
Domain Name  
Set Details  
DNS Dynamic Update Settings  
Off  
ECM TX  
Off  
On  
On  
DNS Dynamic Updt. Time:0 to 24 to 48(hr.)  
33600 bps  
14400 bps  
9600 bps  
4800 bps  
Speed  
mDNS Settings  
Off  
mDNS Name  
On  
Domestic  
Long Distance  
DHCP Option Settings  
International (1)  
International (2)  
International (3)  
Acquire Host Name: Off, On  
DNS Dynamic Update: Off, On  
One-Touch:Registration No.  
E-Mail  
IPv6 Settings  
Use IPv6  
Enter Registration No.  
Off  
On  
Max 16 characters  
Max 120 characters  
Name  
Destination  
View Settings  
One-Touch:Registration No.  
Off  
On  
Stateless Address Settings  
Use DHCPv6  
Group  
View Settings  
Enter Registration No.  
Name  
Max 16 characters  
Off  
On  
Select Coded Dial/One-Touch Dial  
Destination  
View Settings  
One-Touch:Registration No.  
Paper Settings  
<How to display>  
Press [Select Paper/Settings].  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Continues to the next page  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Continues from the previous page  
Continues from the previous page  
Preferences  
Sound Volume Control  
CD-ROM  
DNS Settings  
Fax Tone*2  
Off  
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings  
Use IPv4 Host/Domain  
On  
Off  
- Host Name  
- Fax Volume: 1 to 3  
- Domain Name  
Ring Tone*2  
TX Done Tone*2  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
- Ring Tone Volume: 1 to 3  
DNS Dynamic Update Settings  
Off  
On  
- Register Manual Address: Off, On  
- Register Stateful Address: Off,On  
- Register Stateless Address: Off, On  
- DNS Dynamic Update Time: 0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)  
On  
- TX Done Volume: 1 to 3  
Only When Error Occurs  
- TX Done Volume: 1 to 3  
Off  
mDNS Settings  
WINS Settings  
RX Done Tone*2  
Off  
On  
- Use IPv4 Name for mDNS: Off (mDNS Name), On  
On  
- RX Done Volume: 1 to 3  
Only When Error Occurs  
- RX Done Volume: 1 to 3  
WINS Resolution: Off, On  
(WINS Server Address: 0.0.0.0)  
Scanning Done Tone*2  
Off  
Scope ID  
On  
- Scanning Done Volume:  
1 to 3  
Off  
LPD Settings  
RAW Settings  
On  
Only When Error Occurs  
- Scanning Done Volume:  
1 to 3  
Off  
On  
WSD Settings  
Entry Tone  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Use WSD Print: Off, On  
WSD Print Settings:  
Invalid Entry Tone  
Use WSD Browsing: Off, On  
Use WSD Scan: Off, On  
WSD Scan Settings:  
Restock Supplies Tone  
Warning Tone  
Off  
Use Computer Scan: Off, On  
On  
Off  
Use Multicast Discovery:  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Use HTTP  
Job Done Tone  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
Port Number Settings  
Energy Saver Alert  
LPD: 1 to 515 to 65535  
Display Settings  
CD-ROM  
RAW: 1 to 9100 to 65535  
HTTP: 1to 80 to 65535  
Select Default Screen  
Copy  
Fax  
POP3 RX*1: 1 to 110 to 65535  
SMTP TX*1: 1 to 25 to 65535  
SNMP: 1 to 161 to 65535  
WSD Search: 1 to 3702 to 65535  
Scan  
USB Direct Print  
Language  
English  
French  
1300, 1400, 1500  
MTU Size  
Spanish  
SNMP Settings  
Portuguese  
Off  
SNMPv1 Settings  
Remote UI Language  
English  
French  
On  
Community Name 1: Public  
Community Name 2: Not Set  
MIB Access Permission 1: Read  
Only, Read/Write  
Spanish  
Portuguese  
MIB Access Permission 2: Read  
Only, Read/Write  
Dedicated Community Settings:  
Off, Read/Write, Read Only  
Brightness  
Contrast  
-4 to 0  
-3 to 0 to +3  
Off  
Invert Screen Colors  
mm/Inch Entry Switch  
Gram/Pound Switch  
Off  
SNMPv3 Settings  
On  
On  
mm  
Off  
Printer Management Information From Host  
Dedicated Port Settings  
Startup Settings  
Inch  
On  
Off  
Gram  
Pound  
On  
1 to 2 to 5 (seconds)  
Message Display Time  
Scrolling Speed  
0 to 300 (sec.)  
Slow  
Normal  
Fast  
Ethernet Driver Settings  
Auto Detect  
Off  
- Communication Mode:  
Half Duplex, Full Duplex  
- Ethernet Type:10 Base-T,  
100 Base-TX  
Cursor Movement*2  
Auto  
Manual  
On  
MAC Address  
Off  
IEEE802.1X Settings  
On  
Continues to the next page  
Continues to the next page  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continues from the previous page  
Continues from the lower left  
RX Function Settings  
Timer Settings  
Off  
ECM RX  
Time & Date Settings  
On  
YYYY MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM YYYY  
Date Display Type  
Off  
Incoming Ring  
On  
- Ring Times: 1 to 2 to 99  
(times)  
12 Hour (AM/PM)  
12/24 Hour Clock  
Off  
Remote RX  
24 Hour  
On  
Current Time Settings*4  
Time Zone Settings  
- Remote RX ID: 00 to 25 to  
99  
GMT-12:00 to GMT-5:00  
to GMT+12:00  
Off  
Auto RX Switch  
Off  
Daylight Savings  
On  
On  
- Start (M/W/D)  
- End (M/W/D)  
- Incoming Ring Time: 1 to  
15 to 99 (seconds)  
RX Print Settings  
2-Sided Printing  
3 to 5 to 240 (minutes)  
Sleep Timer  
Off  
On  
(0=Off)  
Auto Reset Timer  
CD-ROM  
1 to 2 to 9 (minutes)  
Off  
Reduce RX Size  
On  
Default Screen  
Screen After Auto Reset  
Auto Offline Time  
CD-ROM  
- Reduction Ratio: Auto, 97,  
95, 90, 75 (%)  
Selected Screen  
- Reduction Method:  
Vertical/Horizontal, Vertical  
Only  
(0=Off)  
CD-ROM  
1 to 5 to 60 (minutes)  
Off  
RX Page Footer  
Common Settings  
On  
Settings or values with a "*" mark may not appear depending on the availability of the optional  
accessories.  
Off  
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low  
Fax Setup Guide*4  
On  
Drawer Auto Selection  
Multi-Purpose Tray: Off, On  
Drawer 1:Off, On  
Copy  
Scan Settings  
TX Function Settings*1  
Change Defaults  
Drawer 2*:Off, On  
Drawer 1:Off, On  
Drawer 2*:Off, On  
Printer  
E-Mail  
Multi-Purpose Tray: Off, On  
Drawer 1:Off, On  
Fax (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Windows (SMB)  
Register Unit Name (E-Mail)  
Memory Media Settings  
Change Defaults  
Drawer 2*:Off, On  
Multi-Purpose Tray: Off, On  
Drawer 1:Off, On  
Other  
Drawer 2*:Off, On  
Output File Image Settings  
Color Send Gamma Value  
Switch Paper Feed Method  
Multi-Purpose Tray: Print Speed Priority, Print Side Priority  
Drawer 1: Print Speed Priority, Print Side Priority  
Drawer 2* : Print Speed Priority, Print Side Priority  
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4,  
Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2  
PDF (Compact) Image Level  
- Image Quality in  
Text/Photo, Photo Mode:  
Data Size Priority, Normal,  
Image Quality Priority  
- Image Quality in Text  
Mode: Data Size Priority,  
Normal, Image Quality  
Priority  
Copy Settings  
Change Defaults  
Fax Settings (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Basic Settings  
USB Direct Print Settings  
Register Unit Telephone Number  
Select Line Type  
Pulse, Tone  
Change Defaults  
Off  
Off-Hook Alarm  
File Sort Default Settings  
Name (Ascending), Name  
(Descending), Date/Time  
(Ascending), Date/Time  
(Descending)  
On  
- Off-Hook Alarm Volume:  
1 to 3  
File Name Format  
Short File Name, Long File  
Name  
TX Function Settings  
Change Defaults  
Register Unit Name (Fax)  
ECM TX  
Printer Settings  
Off  
Copies*1  
1 to 99 (Copies)  
On  
2-Sided Printing*1  
Off  
1 to 2 to 15 (seconds)  
Pause Time  
Auto Redial  
On  
Off  
Default Paper Size*1  
LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC,  
No. 10 (COM10), Monarch,  
DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, A4, A5,  
B5  
On  
1 to 2 to 10 (times)  
Redial Times  
2 to 99 (minutes)  
Redial Interval  
Off  
Paper Size Override  
Print Quality  
Off  
On  
Redial When Err Occurs  
On  
Off  
Sender ID  
-4 to 0 to 4  
Off  
Density  
On  
Toner Save  
On Image  
Above Image  
FAX  
Print Location  
On  
Off  
Image Refinement  
Layout*1  
Mark No. as: TEL/FAX  
Check Dial Tone Before Sending  
On  
TEL  
Off  
Long Edge, Short Edge  
-1.90 to 0.00 to 1.90 (inches)  
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)  
Binding Location  
Gutter  
On  
Offset Short Edge (Front)  
Continues to the upper right  
Continues to the next page  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continues from the lower left  
Special Mode B  
Continues from the previous page  
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)  
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)  
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)  
Off  
Offset Long Edge (Front)  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Offset Short Edge (Back)  
Offset Long Edge (Back)  
Auto Error Skip*1  
Off  
On  
Off  
Special Mode C*  
*Only for printing received fax and report printing.  
On  
Timeout*1  
Personality*1  
PCL*1  
5 to 15 to 300 (Seconds)  
Auto, PS, PCL  
Off  
Special Mode D  
On  
Paper Save  
Off  
On  
Clean Fixing Unit  
Clean Feeder  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Landscape  
System Settings  
Font Number  
Point Size  
Pitch  
0 to 56  
Network Settings  
4.00 to 012.00 to 999.75 (point)  
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)  
5 to 60 to 128 (lines)  
System Manager Information Settings  
CD-ROM  
Form Lines  
Symbol Set  
System Manager ID: Up to seven digits  
System Manager PIN: Up to seven digits  
System Manager Name: Up to 32 characters  
PC8, PC850, PC852, PC8DN, PC8TK, PIFONT,  
PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH,  
VNUS, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,  
DESKTOP, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO4,  
ISO6, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5,  
ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL,  
PC1004, PC775  
Device Information Settings  
CD-ROM  
Device Name: Up to 32 characters  
Custom Paper  
Unit of Measure  
Off  
On  
Location: Up to 32 characters  
Dept. ID Management On/Off  
Off  
Millimeters  
On  
Inches  
Security Settings  
Use SSL  
X dimension  
3 to 8_1/2 (inches)  
5 to 14_0/0 (inches)  
Off  
Y dimension  
On  
Append CR to LF  
Yes  
No  
Off  
On  
IPv4 Address Filter  
Send Filter  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Enlarge A4 Print Width  
Halftones  
Receive Filter  
Color Tone, Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution  
Color Tone, Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution  
Color Tone, Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution  
Text  
IPv6 Address Filter  
Send Filter  
Graphics  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Images (e.g. photographic images)  
PS*1  
Job Timeout  
Receive Filter  
0 to 3600 (Seconds)  
MAC Address Filter  
Send Filter  
Print PS Errors  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Halftones  
Receive Filter  
Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution  
Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution  
Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution  
Text  
Graphics  
Images (e.g. photographic images)  
Communication Management Settings*2  
Fax Settings  
TX Start Speed: 33600 bps, 14400 bps,  
9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps  
Adjustment/Maintenance  
RX Start Speed: 33600 bps, 14400 bps,  
9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps  
Copy Image Adjustment  
Printer Density  
Off  
Memory Lock Settings  
Toner Saver Mode  
Off  
On  
On  
Memory Lock PIN  
Print Report  
Black Text Processing for Color  
Feeder  
Off  
On  
Off  
-3 to 0 to +3  
-3 to 0 to +3  
Platen Glass  
Memory Lock Time:Not Set  
Select Country/Region*4  
Special Processing  
Special Mode U  
CD-ROM  
On  
- Memory Lock Start Time  
- Memory Lock End Time  
Off  
On  
United States (US)*3  
Canada (CA)  
Brazil (BR)  
Mexico (MX)  
Other  
Off  
Special Mode V  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Forwarding Settings*4  
Off  
Special Mode X*1 *  
Off  
On  
*Only for media printing and printing from PS/PCL printer driver.  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Store/Print When Forwarding  
Off, On, Only When Error Occurs  
Print Images  
Do Not Store, Only When Error Occurs  
Store Images in Memory  
Off  
Special Mode Z*  
*Only for copying.  
Remote UI On/Off*4  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Mode 3  
Off  
On  
Restrict TX Function*2  
Address Book PIN  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Restrict New Destinations  
Allow Fax Driver TX  
Continues to the upper right  
Continues to the next page  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Continues from the previous page  
Reports  
Off  
Restrict History TX  
<How to display>  
On  
Press [Report].  
1
2
Off  
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
The report output menu is displayed.  
On  
Keys to be used for this operation  
Off  
Confirm Sequential Broadcast  
Reject Sequential Broadcast  
1
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Display Job History  
2
USB Device On/Off  
Memory Media Storage On/Off  
USB Direct Print On/Off  
Secure Print Settings*1  
Reports Settings*2  
TX Result Report  
CD-ROM  
Secure Print Del. Time:  
10 to 30 to 240 (min.)  
Off  
On  
Select PDL (Plug-n-Play)*1  
Network  
Only When Error Occurs  
FAX, UFRII LT, UFRII LT  
(XPS), PCL5, PCL6, PS  
Off  
Report With TX Image  
On  
UFRII LT, UFRII LT (XPS),  
USB  
Communication Management Report  
Auto Print (40 Transmissions)  
PCL5, PCL6, PS  
Update Firmware  
Off  
Initialize Key and Certificate  
Initialize Address Book*2  
Initialize System Settings  
System Administrator Settings  
Device Information Settings  
Dept. ID Management On/Off  
Network Settings  
On  
Separate TX/RX  
RX Result Report  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Only When Error Occurs  
Print Reports  
CD-ROM  
Address Book List*2  
Coded Dial  
One-Touch  
Group  
Security Settings  
Communication Management Settings  
Forwarding Settings  
User Data List  
Store/Print When Forwarding  
Remote UI On/Off  
System Manager Data List  
Communication Management Report*2  
Dept. ID Management Report  
PCL Font List *1  
Restrict TX Function  
Display Job History On/Off  
USB Device On/Off  
PS Font List *1  
Memory Media Storage On/Off  
USB Direct Print On/Off  
Secure Print Settings  
Select PDL (Plug-n-Play)  
All of the above  
Initialize Menu  
Preferences  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
CD-ROM  
Timer Settings  
Common Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
Scan Settings  
USB Direct Print Settings  
Printer Settings  
Initialize All  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
11  
Appendix  
This section describes the specifications of the machine and information for Macintosh users.  
Main Specifications  
11-2  
Machine Specifications  
11-2  
11-2  
11-2  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
11-3  
Copy Specifications  
Printer Specification  
Scanner Specifications  
Fax Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Telephone Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Transmission Specification (D1370 Only)  
Optional Drawer  
For Macintosh Users  
11-4  
Displaying Driver Guides  
11-4  
11-4  
Displaying a Driver’s Help System  
Content of the e-Manual about Features that Are Unavailable on the  
Macintosh  
11-4  
Index  
11-5  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Main Specifications  
Machine Specifications  
Copy Specifications  
Machine Specifications  
Copy Specifications  
Type  
Personal Desktop  
• Text/Photo: 300 dpi x 600 dpi  
• Text/Photo (Quality), Photo, Text: 600 dpi  
x 600 dpi  
120 to 127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements can  
vary by country. They depend on where you  
purchased the product.)  
Scan Resolution  
Power Supply  
Output Resolution  
600 dpi x 600 dpi  
• Maximum: 1,100 W or less  
• Average consumption during standby mode:  
Approx. 9W  
• Average consumption during sleep mode:  
Approx. 2.3W  
• Direct 1:1 1.0 %  
Power Consumption  
• Enlargement 1:4.00, 1:2.00, 1:1.29  
• Reduction 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50, 1:0.25  
• Zoom 0.25 to 4.00, 1% increments  
Copy Ratio  
11 seconds or less*  
Copy Speed (Letter  
Plain Direct)*  
(Temperature: 68 °F (20 °C), humidity: 65%  
RH ; from when the machine is turned ON  
using the main power switch to when the  
standby screen is displayed)  
* Warm-up time may vary depending  
on the conditions of the installation  
environment.  
35 cpm  
Continuous Copying  
Capacity  
Warm-up Time  
Maximum 99 copies  
8 seconds or less  
First Copy Time  
(Letter)  
• D1370/D1350  
Main unit (the toner cartridge included):  
Approx. 47.2 lb (21.4 kg)  
* The copy speed on Letter size plain paper on one-side printing  
is measured during continuous copying. Copy speeds vary  
depending on the paper type and size, as well as the paper feeding  
direction. Copy speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower.  
Plus, the machine may experience downtime or decrease the  
copy speed in the middle of a continuous copy run to adjust the  
temperature inside the machine or maintain the optimal print  
quality.  
Weight  
• D1320  
Main unit (the toner cartridge included):  
Approx. 46.7 lb (21.2 kg)  
• In the normal state  
17 3/4x 18 5/8x 18 3/8”  
Dimensions  
(W x L x H)  
(450 mm x 472 mm x 465 mm)  
• When the optional drawer is installed  
17 3/4x 18 5/8x 23 3/4”  
Printer Specification  
(450 mm x 472 mm x 603 mm)  
• In the normal state  
25 5/8x 52 7/8x 32 1/2”  
Printer Specification  
Installation Space  
(W x L x H)  
(650 mm x 1,341 mm x 824 mm)  
• When the optional drawer is installed  
25 5/8x 52 7/8x 37 7/8”  
Indirect electrostatic system (On-demand  
Printing Method  
fixing)  
Multi-purpose tray: Approx. 50 sheets (16 to  
23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²))  
Paper drawer: Approx. 500 sheets (16 to 23  
(650 mm x 1,341 mm x 962 mm)  
Temperature: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)  
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)  
Environmental  
Conditions  
Acceptable Documents  
Acceptable Paper Stock  
Printable Area  
Scan Area  
Paper Capacity  
lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²))  
Cassette Feeding Unit-U1 (Optional):  
Approx. 500 sheets (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to  
89 g/m²))  
Output Tray Capacity Output tray: Approx. 150 sheets (20 lb Bond  
(a fresh stack of  
(75 g/m²))*1  
Letter size paper)  
Sub Output tray: 1 sheet  
Print Speed (Letter  
Plain Direct)*2  
35 ppm  
First Print Time  
(Letter)  
6 seconds or less*3  
Output Resolution  
Gradation  
Equivalent to 1200dpi x 600dpi  
256 gradations  
Toner Cartridge  
* 1  
The actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation  
environment and paper type used.  
* 2  
The print speed on Letter size plain paper on one-side printing is  
measured during continuous printing. Print speeds vary depending  
on the paper type and size, as well as the paper feeding direction.  
Print speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower. Plus, the  
machine may experience downtime or decrease the print speed  
in the middle of a continuous print run to adjust the temperature  
inside the machine or maintain the optimal print quality.  
May vary depending on the output environment.  
* 3  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanner Specifications  
Telephone Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Scanner Specifications  
Telephone Specifications  
Type  
Color scanner  
External telephone/External telephone with  
Telephone Type  
• Platen glass: up to 8 1/2x 14(215.9 mm  
x 355.6 mm)  
the built-in answer function/Data modem  
Maximum Scan Size  
• Feeder: up to 8 1/2x 14(215.9 mm x  
355.6 mm)  
Transmission Specification (D1370 Only)  
• Optical resolution  
Platen glass: up to 600 x 600 dpi  
Feeder: up to 300 x 300 dpi  
• Software interpolation resolution  
9600 dpi x 9600 dpi  
Specification for File Server Transmission  
Scan Resolution  
Communication  
SMB (TCP/IP)  
Protocol  
Data Format  
Resolution  
PDF (Compact), PDF, JPEG, TIFF  
Resolutions for data formats are;  
Scan Speed (Letter,  
300 x 300 dpi)*  
• Color: 10 sheets/minute  
• Black and White: 29 sheets/minute  
JPEG  
TIFF  
PDF  
PDF (Compact)  
Text: 300  
dpi  
Background:  
150 dpi  
Text: 300  
dpi  
Background:  
150 dpi  
• 100 Base-TX  
• 10 Base-T  
• Hi-Speed USB  
• USB  
Black  
and  
White  
300 dpi  
(MMR  
Compression)  
300 dpi  
(MMR  
Compression)  
Host Interface  
Operating System  
Driver  
300  
dpi  
300 dpi  
(JPEG  
200 dpi  
(JPEG  
• Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7  
• Mac OS 10.4.9 or later  
300  
dpi  
Color  
Compression) Compression)  
• TWAIN  
• Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008  
• Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or  
later)  
• Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or  
later)  
• WIA 1.0 (Windows XP)  
• WIA 2.0 (Windows Vista/7)  
• ICA (Mac OS X 10.6.x)  
System  
Environment  
* Scan speeds were only measured.  
Fax Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only)  
Fax Specifications  
• Mac OS X (Mac OS X 10.7 is not supported.)  
Interface  
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T  
Color, Black/White  
Color Mode  
Inputted Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo  
Public Switched Telephone Network  
Line Used  
(PSTN)*1  
Paper Size  
LTR/LGL/STMT  
Communication Mode G3  
Specification for E-mail Sending  
SMTP*  
Compression  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
Method  
Communication  
Protocol  
33.6 Kbps  
Modem Speed  
Data Format  
PDF (Compact), PDF  
Automatic Fallback  
Resolutions for data formats are;  
Approx. 3 seconds per page*2  
(ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the memory  
at 33.6 Kbps)  
PDF  
PDF (Compact)  
Text: 300 dpi  
Transmission Speed  
300 dpi  
Black and White  
Resolution  
(MMR Compression) Background:150 dpi  
Sending from  
Memory/Receiving in  
Memory  
200 dpi Text: 300 dpi  
(JPEG Compression) Background:150 dpi  
Maximum approx. 512 pages*2  
(Total pages of transmission/reception)  
Color  
• Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008  
• Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or  
• (Normal): 200 dpi x 100 dpi  
• (Fine): 200 dpi x 200 dpi  
• (Photo): 200 dpi x 200 dpi  
• (Superfine): 200 dpi x 400 dpi  
• (Ultrafine): 400 dpi x 400 dpi  
System  
Environment  
later)  
Fax Resolution  
• Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or  
later)  
• Mac OS X  
• One-touch keys (19 destinations)  
• Coded dialing (181 destinations)  
• Group dialing (199 destinations)  
• Address book dialing  
• Regular dialing (with numeric keys)  
• Automatic redialing  
Interface  
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T  
Color, Black/White  
Color Mode  
Inputted Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo  
Paper Size LTR/LGL/STMT  
Dialing  
• Manual redialing  
• Sequential broadcast (210 destinations)  
* POP3 is available to use only when authenticating before sending  
Optional Drawer  
• Automatic reception  
• Remote reception by telephone (Default  
ID: 25)  
Receiving  
Reports  
Cassette Feeding Unit-U1  
• Send Results  
Paper Capacity  
Available Paper  
Power Supply  
500 sheets (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²))  
From main unit  
• Transmission management report (Auto  
output every 40 destinations)  
• RX Results  
*1  
The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports  
28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower. Note that speeds can vary  
depending on the telephone line conditions.  
Dimensions  
(W x L x H)  
17 3/4x 18 5/8x 6 5/8(450 mm x 472 mm x  
166.3 mm  
*2  
Weight  
Approx. 11.5 lb (5.2 kg)  
Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector)  
Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Macintosh Users  
In this manual, methods to operate in the Windows environment are explained as examples. To view how to use printer drivers or  
utilities for Macintosh, see the following driver guides (HTML files) or driver help systems.  
Function  
Object  
Reference  
• Starter Guide  
Installing the Printer Driver  
• Printer Driver Installation Guide  
• Printer Driver Installation Guide  
• Printer Driver’s Help  
Print function  
Printing  
Using each feature  
• Starter Guide  
• Mac Fax Driver Installation Guide  
Installing the Fax Driver  
Fax function  
(D1370/D1350  
Only)  
Sending a fax  
• Mac Fax Driver Installation Guide  
• Fax Driver’s Help  
Using each feature  
• Starter Guide  
• Mac Scanner Driver Guide  
Installing the Scanner Driver  
Scan function  
Scanning (Setting the MF Toolbox or ScanGear MF)  
• Mac Scanner Driver Guide  
Accessory software  
Displaying Driver Guides  
• Presto! PageManager  
Double-click the following HTML files from the [Documents]  
folder on the provided CD-ROM.  
Reference in the e- Manual “User Software CD-ROM”  
Mac UFR II Printer Driver Installation Guide  
[Documents] - [Print] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
Mac PS Printer Driver Installation Guide  
[Documents] - [Print(PS)] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
Mac Fax Driver Installation Guide (D1370/D1350 Only)  
[Documents] - [FAX] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
Mac Scanner Driver Guide  
Using WSD network  
“Installing the MF Drivers on the WSD  
Network“  
Reference in the e- Manual  
Some print features  
<Examples>  
• Operating in the print server environment  
• Watermark printing  
[Documents] - [Scan] - [Guide] - [index.html]  
• PageComposer (Combining and printing multiple files)  
• Changing the halftone  
• Adjusting the gamma value  
For information on the features that are available on the  
Macintosh, see the Printer Driver’s help system.  
Displaying a Drivers Help System  
You can use drivershelp systems after you install each driver.  
“Printing Documents from a  
Reference in the e- Manual  
Computer”  
Printer Drivers Help  
From the below panels in the [Print] dialog, click [  
• [Basic] panel  
].  
Some scan features  
<Examples>  
• [Advanced] panel  
• Creating aSearchable PDF”  
For information on the features that are available on the  
Macintosh, see the Mac Scanner Driver Guide.  
Fax Driver’s Help (D1370/D1350 Only)  
From the below panels in the [Print] dialog, click [  
• [General Settings] panel  
].  
Reference in the e- Manual “Scanning”  
• [Special Features] panel  
• [Cover Sheet] panel  
Content of the e-Manual about Features  
that Are Unavailable on the Macintosh  
Among the features explained in the e-Manual, the followings  
are unavailable on the Macintosh.  
Installing or uninstalling the e-Manual  
“Installing the e-Manual”  
Reference in the e- Manual  
“Uninstalling the e-Manual”  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
I n d e x  
Documents  
C
Clearing Jams............................................................... 9-2  
Placing.............................................................................. 2-4  
Receiving Faxes........................................................ 6-11  
Requirements............................................................... 2-2  
Scan Area........................................................................ 2-2  
Sending Faxes.............................................................. 6-2  
Documents Requirements................................. 2-2  
Canceling  
Fax Jobs............................................................................ 6-6  
Changing the Default Values  
Copy................................................................................ 3-12  
Fax .................................................................................... 6-21  
Cleaning the Machine.......................................... 8-2  
Exterior ............................................................................. 8-2  
Fixing Unit...................................................................... 8-2  
Platen Glass.................................................................... 8-3  
Coded dial................................................................ 5-2  
Coded Dial Codes  
E
Error Code................................................................ 9-8  
Editing............................................................................... 5-6  
Storing.............................................................................. 5-6  
Contents of the Setting Menu....................... 10-2  
Copying..................................................................... 3-1  
2-Sided Copying......................................................... 3-6  
Collating Copies ......................................................... 3-8  
Enlarging/Reducing Copies................................ 3-7  
ID Card.............................................................................. 3-9  
N on 1................................................................................ 3-7  
Copy Mode .............................................................. 1-6  
Copyright .................................................................. xix  
F
Fax Documents in the Memory  
Forwarding ................................................................. 6-15  
History............................................................................ 6-20  
Received Fax Documents.................................. 6-19  
Transmission Documents.................................. 6-18  
Fax mode.................................................................. 1-6  
Fax Settings .......................................................... 6-22  
Feeder........................................................................ 1-2  
G
D
Group Dialing  
Date Settings........................................................ 1-12  
Density  
Editing............................................................................... 5-9  
Storing.............................................................................. 5-9  
Copy................................................................................... 3-5  
Disclaimers................................................................. xx  
Display....................................................................... 1-6  
Display Messages....................................................... 9-8  
LCD (Standby Mode) ............................................... 1-6  
Document feeder tray ......................................... 1-2  
Document guides.................................................. 1-2  
H
Handling................................................................... xiv  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I
P
Paper  
Image Quality  
Copy................................................................................... 3-5  
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3  
Installation............................................................... xiii  
Requirements............................................................... xvii  
Space................................................................................. xvii  
Clearing Jams............................................................... 9-2  
Loading............................................................................ 2-9  
Paper Size and Type............................................... 2-14  
Printable Area............................................................... 2-8  
Supported Paper Types.......................................... 2-6  
Paper Drawer ................................................. 1-2, 1-4  
Platen glass.............................................................. 1-3  
Power Supply.......................................................... xiii  
Requirements............................................................... xvii  
Printing a User Data List................................... 10-2  
Printing from a Computer.................................. 4-1  
L
LAN port ................................................................... 1-3  
M
Main Specifications............................................ 11-2  
Copy specifications................................................ 11-2  
Fax Specifications.................................................... 11-3  
Machine Specifications....................................... 11-2  
Printer Specification.............................................. 11-2  
Scanner Specifications ........................................ 11-3  
Telephone Specifications................................... 11-3  
Maintenance and Inspections .................. xv, xviii  
Manual Sending..................................................... 6-8  
Multi-purpose Tray  
R
Registering/Setting theVarious Functions... 10-1  
RX Mode ................................................................ 6-11  
Answer mode............................................................ 6-13  
Auto mode.................................................................. 6-11  
Changing..................................................................... 6-14  
Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode................................ 6-12  
Manual mode............................................................ 6-13  
Paper Guide................................................................... 1-2  
S
Scan Area.................................................................. 2-2  
Scan Functions....................................................... 7-1  
Scan Mode............................................................... 1-6  
Selecting Print Side............................................ 2-17  
Sequential Broadcast........................................ 6-10  
Sharpness  
O
One-Touch Keys  
Editing............................................................................... 5-3  
Storing.............................................................................. 5-3  
Operation Panel............................................ 1-2, 1-4  
Output tray.............................................................. 1-2  
Copy................................................................................... 3-8  
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3  
Sleep Timer........................................................... 1-11  
Specifying Destinations...................................... 6-4  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
Telephone Equipment......................................... xvi  
Telephone line jack............................................... 1-3  
Text Input Method................................................ 1-9  
Time Settings....................................................... 1-12  
Toner Cartridge  
Handling.......................................................................... 8-6  
Replacing Toner Cartridge ................................... 8-8  
Trademarks............................................................... xix  
Transporting the Machine............................... 8-14  
Troubleshooting.................................................... 9-1  
Clearing Jams............................................................... 9-2  
Error Code ...................................................................... 9-8  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem....................... 9-13  
When a Power Failure Occurs ......................... 9-14  
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears... 9-11  
U
USB port.................................................................... 1-3  
W
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears... 9-11  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANON INC.  
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.  
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg, 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.  
15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD  
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia  
Serial No.  
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES  
http://www.canon.com/  
Date of Purchase  
FT5-4226 (000)  
XXXXXXXXXX  
© CANON INC. 2011  
PRINTED IN CHINA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Belkin Computer Keyboard F8E839UKBNDL User Manual
Black Box Switch IC165A User Manual
Brother Sewing Machine LX2500 User Manual
Calphalon Convection Oven he650co User Manual
Canon Network Router MG5320 User Manual
Carrier Fan 30GK User Manual
Cecilware Coffeemaker Java Giant User Manual
Char Broil Gas Grill LP Gas Grill User Manual
Chauvet Video Game Controller CH 324 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing Mobility Aid CM2C40 User Manual